JP2015160011A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a technique capable of inhibiting lowering of interest in a game without lowering a degree of a player's attention to game balls.SOLUTION: When the number of variations after a jackpot is "1-5 times" or "11-20 times", a game machine uses a variation pattern selection table A and, when the number of variations is "6-10 times" or "21 times or more", uses a variation pattern selection table B. Out of a plurality of regulated small winning symbols, when the number of variations after a small winning corresponding to a small winning symbol E is "1-20 times", the game machine uses a variation pattern selection table C. In principle, special variations after the small winning are continued up to 20 variations. However, as an exception thereof, when a specific release condition is satisfied before reaching the 20 variations, a reference destination table is switched from the table C to the table B. However, after the small winning corresponding to a small winning symbol D, the switching to the variation pattern selection table C is not executed.

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine that, when a lottery opportunity occurs during a game, displays a symbol in a manner that displays a result of a lottery after a symbol change display.

  Conventionally, as this type of gaming machine, when an internal lottery is executed, a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the special symbol display device, and if it wins, a big win symbol of a winning mode is displayed and a special game (a big win game) is generated. In the effect display device, an effect peculiar to the big hit game is performed, and the player's sense of superiority and excitement are enhanced. Here, at the same time as the execution of the internal lottery, a lottery related to the variation display of the special symbol is also performed, and one of the variation pattern tables composed of a plurality of types of variation patterns is selected, and the selected variation pattern is selected. On the basis of the special symbol display device, the special symbol is variably displayed. Then, after the big hit game is over, the gaming state is set to a time shortening state that is more advantageous than the normal state, and switching is performed to a variation pattern table different from the normal state. Further, a technique is disclosed in which a variation pattern table is further switched when a special symbol variation display is performed over a predetermined number of variations in a time reduction state (see, for example, Patent Document 1). Also disclosed is a technique for switching to a variation pattern table that is different from the normal state after a big hit game with a special big hit symbol displayed or after a small hit game with a small hit symbol displayed. (For example, refer to Patent Document 2).

JP 2011-15742 A Japanese Patent No. 4658881

  In the prior art described above, various effects can be executed as special fluctuations after the end of the big hit game or after the end of the small hit game until the number of changes in the special symbol reaches a predetermined value.

  Here, the special variation is realized by switching a variation pattern selection table to be referenced with a big hit game or a small hit game as an opportunity. And, for example, when a special variation is performed 10 times after a big hit game or after a small hit game, a game with a special variation is executed until the 10 variation elapses. Can clearly communicate that they have entered a special gaming state.

  However, such special variation is a technique that is well practiced as in the prior art described above, and there is no such novelty. In particular, for a player who already knows the mechanism of such a special variation, for example, it is clearly understood that “the game by the special variation will continue until ten variations are completed”, and a novel game I can't show my sexuality.

  Accordingly, an object of the present invention is to provide a technique capable of exhibiting a novel game characteristic by adopting an unprecedented variation pattern switching method.

The present invention employs the following means for solving the above problems. In addition, the wording in the following brackets is an illustration to the last, and this invention is not limited to this.
Solution 1: The gaming machine of the present solution has an internal lottery execution means for executing an internal lottery when a lottery trigger occurs during the game, and when the internal lottery is executed, the symbols are variably displayed over a predetermined fluctuation time. A symbol display means for stopping and displaying symbols in a manner according to the result of the internal lottery, and a variation pattern that predefines a plurality of types of variation patterns including special variation patterns with respect to the symbol variation pattern by the symbol display means A defining means; a variation pattern determining means for selectively determining any one of a plurality of types of variation patterns defined by the variation pattern defining means when executing the symbol variation display by the symbol display means; and the internal For results other than non-winnings obtained by lottery, a plurality of non-winnings including at least a special type, a first special type, and a second special type If a result other than non-winning is obtained in the internal lottery, a lottery result prescribing means that prescribes a type other than a plurality of non-winning types specified by the lottery result prescribing means A lottery type determining means for determining; a special game executing means for executing a special game when the symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to the special type by the symbol display means; and the first special type by the symbol display means. Alternatively, special game execution means for executing a special game when a symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode corresponding to the second special type, and the number of variable display of the symbol executed by the symbol display means after the special game ends. The special variation pattern can be selected as a variation pattern that can be selected by the variation pattern determination means for the special section until the number of variations after special game reaches a specified number of times corresponding to The variation pattern selecting means to be selected, and when a specific condition is satisfied during the special section, the variation pattern determining means selects the variation pattern that can be selected by the variation pattern determining means before the number of variations after the special game reaches the specified number of times. When the special game executed by the special game execution means corresponds to the second special type when the special game pattern is switched to another fluctuation pattern and the special game is executed by the change pattern selection means after completion of the special game. A gaming machine comprising: a fluctuation pattern switching means that enables selection of a fluctuation pattern that can be selected by the fluctuation pattern determination means before the start of the special game without switching to the special fluctuation pattern.

The game by the game machine of this solution progresses, for example along the flow shown below.
(1) When a lottery opportunity occurs during a game (when a game ball enters the start winning opening), an internal lottery (special symbol lottery) is executed. For this reason, the player plays a game with the initial goal of generating a lottery opportunity.

(2) When the internal lottery of (1) is executed, the symbol (special symbol) is variably displayed over a predetermined variation time, and the symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to the result of the internal lottery. It takes a certain amount of time (fluctuation time and stop display time) from the start of the symbol display to the stop display. Once the symbol display is started, the stop display is completed. The next lottery will not be held until

(3) Regarding the pattern variation pattern of (2) above, a plurality of types of variation patterns including special variation patterns are defined in advance. Here, the “special variation pattern” is a variation pattern different from the “basic variation pattern” that is most frequently used during the game. The “special variation pattern” is a variation pattern that is selected regardless of the internal state when a special variation state is reached (for example, after a predetermined number of variations elapses after the small hit game ends). The special variation pattern is not limited to one variation pattern, and may be composed of a plurality of types of variation patterns (for example, the first special variation pattern A, the first special variation pattern B, etc.).
(4) When executing the symbol variation display of (2) above, any one variation pattern is selectively determined from among the plurality of variation patterns defined by (3) above.

(5) With regard to the results other than the non-winnings obtained in the internal lottery of (1) above, a plurality of winning types (including various types of jackpots) including special types (big hits) and special types (small hits) are defined in advance. ing. Also, with regard to special types (small hits), a plurality of special types are defined in advance, for example, a first special type (first small hit) and a second special type (second small hit) are specified. .
(6) When a result other than non-winning is obtained in the internal lottery in (1) above, it is determined which of the plurality of winning types defined in (5) above is applicable.

(7) A special game is executed when the symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode corresponding to the special type (first special type or second special type) of (5) above. A special game basically corresponds to a small hit game.
On the other hand, the special game is executed when the symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode corresponding to the special type (5). The special game basically corresponds to a jackpot game, such as a 2-round jackpot game or a 16-round jackpot game.

(8) After the end of the special game in (7) above, the selectable variation pattern for the special section until the number of post-special game variation reaches a specified number of times (for example, 20) is the “special variation” in (3) above. It is regulated by “variation pattern”. Here, the “number of times of change after special game” is the number of times of change display of symbols executed by the above (2) after the end of the special game.

(9) And, when a specific release condition (for example, a condition related to the number of changes in symbols) is satisfied in the special section of (8) above (for example, when the number of changes after special game reaches a specific switching value) ), The restriction according to (8) above is released before the number of fluctuations after the special game reaches the specified number, and the selectable fluctuation pattern is switched from the special fluctuation pattern to another fluctuation pattern. Note that the other variation pattern may be a non-special variation pattern (basic variation pattern) or another special variation pattern.

(10) Here, when the display of the symbol stop display when the special game (7) is executed is the second special type, the restriction on the “special variation pattern” in (8) is invalid. Thus, the variation pattern that can be selected before the special game is continued.

  As described above, according to this solution, the selection of the special variation pattern is triggered by the special type (small hit), but the switching from the special variation pattern to another variation pattern is a specific release. The opportunity is met. However, switching to the special variation pattern is not executed every time the second special type (second small hit) is selected. Specifically, even if a special game corresponding to the second special type is executed, switching to another special variation pattern is not executed.

  Usually, when it is desired to end the fluctuation due to the special fluctuation pattern, it must reach a predetermined number of fluctuations or correspond to the winning type (big hit or small hit) to cancel the special fluctuation. However, it takes a certain number of fluctuations to reach the specified number of fluctuations. In addition, the fact that it corresponds to the winning type (big hit or small hit) that cancels the special variation is based on the result of the internal lottery, so it is not always convenient to win. For this reason, it is difficult to end the variation due to the special variation pattern at an arbitrary timing.

  On the other hand, in this solution, when a specific release condition is satisfied, the change pattern that can be selected is switched from the special change pattern to another change pattern. Variations can be terminated. In addition, by adopting such an unprecedented variation pattern switching method, a novel game characteristic can be exhibited.

  In addition, in this solution, when a specific release condition is satisfied, the selectable variation pattern is switched from the special variation pattern to another variation pattern before the number of variations after the special game reaches the specified number of times. The later special section (section in which special variation is executed) can be made substantially variable (N times), and new game play can be exhibited.

  Further, in the present solution, even when a special game corresponding to the second special type (second small hit) is executed, switching to another special variation pattern is not executed. As a result, when a special variation pattern is set to be selectable, even if a special game is executed, there is no switching to the special variation pattern. It is possible to prevent a special performance corresponding to the pattern from being interrupted in the middle, and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  Solution 2: The gaming machine of the present solution is the solution 1, wherein the variation pattern switching unit has a predetermined number of variations after special game corresponding to the number of symbol variations displayed after the end of the special game. The special game is executed by the special game executing means when the special game is executed from the first number of times to the second number of times, and the special game executed by the special game executing means is assigned to the second special type. If it is compatible, the variation pattern that can be selected by the variation pattern determination means before the start of the special game without switching to the special variation pattern by the variation pattern selection means after the end of the special game This is a gaming machine characterized in that it can be selected.

  In this solution, even if a special game corresponding to the second special type (second small hit) is executed in a predetermined switching invalid section, switching to another special variation pattern is not executed. As a result, when a special variation pattern is set to be selectable, even if a special game is executed, there is no switching to the special variation pattern. It is possible to prevent a special performance corresponding to the pattern from being interrupted in the middle, and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  Solution 3: The gaming machine of the present solution is the solution 2, wherein the variation pattern selection unit executes the special game by the special game execution unit when the number of variations after the special game is within the special section. And when the special display executed by the special game execution means is triggered by the symbol display means by the symbol display means corresponding to the first special type, For the special section from the end of the game, the special variation pattern is selected as a variation pattern that can be selected by the variation pattern determining means, and the number of variations after the special game is a third number from a predetermined third number to a fourth number. When the special game is executed by the special game execution means when it is within two special sections, and the special game executed by the special game execution means When the display mode of the symbol display by the symbol display means corresponds to the second special type, the variation pattern determination means can be selected for the special section after the end of the special game. The special variation pattern is selected as a variation pattern, and the variation pattern switching means executes the special game by the special game execution means when the number of variations after the special game is within the second special section, and If the special game executed by the special game execution means corresponds to the first special type, the change to the special variation pattern by the variation pattern selection means after the end of the special game, A gaming machine characterized in that the variation pattern that can be selected by the variation pattern determination means before the start of the special game can be selected.

  When the special game corresponding to the first special type (first small hit) is executed when the number of changes after the special game is in the first switching invalid section, the change pattern that can be selected after the end of the special game is Regulated by “special variation pattern”. Further, when a special game corresponding to the second special type (second small hit) is executed when the number of fluctuations after the special game is in the second switching invalid section, a change that can be selected after the special game ends. The pattern is restricted to a “special variation pattern”.

  On the other hand, when the special game corresponding to the second special type (second small hit) is executed in the first switching invalid section, or the special game corresponding to the first special type (first small hit) in the second switching invalid section. When a game is executed, switching to another special variation pattern is not executed. As a result, when a special variation pattern is set to be selectable, even if a special game is executed, there is no switching to the special variation pattern. It is possible to prevent a special performance corresponding to the pattern from being interrupted in the middle, and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  Solution 4: The gaming machine of the present solution is any one of solutions 1 to 3, wherein the variation pattern defining unit is different from the first special variation pattern and the first special variation pattern as the special variation pattern. A second special variation pattern is defined, and the variation pattern selecting means is configured as the variation pattern that can be selected by the variation pattern determining means for a special section until the number of times of variation after the special game reaches a predetermined number of times. While selecting one special variation pattern, for the special section, the second special variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern that can be selected by the variation pattern determination means, and the variation pattern switching means When a special game is executed, before the special game variation number reaches the predetermined number, By shifting to the special section, the variation pattern that can be selected by the variation pattern determining means is switched from the first special variation pattern to the second special variation pattern, while the specific condition is satisfied in the special section. In this case, the variation pattern that can be selected by the variation pattern determination means is changed to the second variation pattern by shifting from the special segment to the special segment before the number of variations after the special game reaches the specified number of times. A gaming machine that switches from a special variation pattern to the first special variation pattern.

The following features are added to the gaming machine of this solution.
(1) As the special variation pattern, a first special variation pattern and a second special variation pattern are defined. The first special variation pattern and the second special variation pattern are different types of special variation patterns. For example, the first special variation pattern can be a variation pattern having a long variation time, and the second special variation pattern is the first special variation pattern. A variation pattern having a variation time shorter than that of the special variation pattern can be obtained. In addition, the first special variation pattern can be a variation pattern that is likely to reach, and the second special variation pattern can be a variation pattern that is less likely to reach than the first special variation pattern.

(2) The “first special variation pattern” of (1) above is selected for the special section until the number of variations after the special game reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 times) after the completion of the special game. For the special section, the selectable fluctuation pattern is restricted to the second special fluctuation pattern.

(3) If the special category (small hit) falls within the special section of (2) above, the special (2) above will occur before the number of changes after the special game reaches the predetermined number (10 times). By shifting from the section to the special section (2) above, the selectable variation pattern is switched from the first special variation pattern to the second special variation pattern, while a specific release condition is set during the special section (2). Is satisfied, the change pattern that can be selected becomes the second change pattern by shifting from the special section of (2) to the special section of (2) before the number of changes after special game reaches the specified number of times. The special variation pattern is switched to the first special variation pattern.

  As described above, according to the present solution, the switching from the first special variation pattern to the second special variation pattern is triggered by the fact that it corresponds to the special type (small hit). Switching to one special variation pattern is not triggered by a special type (big hit), but triggered by a specific release condition being satisfied.

  Normally, when the second special variation pattern is used and the first special variation pattern is desired to be used, it must correspond to a special type (big hit) corresponding to the first special variation pattern. However, the fact that it corresponds to the special type (big hit) is based on the result of the internal lottery, and therefore does not always fall into the special type (big hit) conveniently. For this reason, it is difficult to switch from the second special variation pattern to the first special variation pattern at a desired timing.

  On the other hand, in this solution, when a specific release condition is satisfied, the second special variation pattern is switched to the first special variation pattern even if it does not correspond to the special type (big hit). Therefore, the second special variation pattern can be switched to the first special variation pattern at a desired timing. In addition, by adopting such an unprecedented variation pattern switching method, a novel game characteristic can be exhibited.

  Solution 5: The gaming machine of the present solution is the solution 4 in which the first special variation pattern is composed of a plurality of different special variation patterns, and in the special section, the variation after the special game. Depending on the number of times, the plurality of special variation pattern groups are used in a predetermined order, and the variation pattern switching means is configured to change one special variation pattern group from the other among the plurality of special variation pattern groups. When the situation of switching to the special variation pattern group occurs, the variation pattern that can be selected by the variation pattern determination means is changed from the second special variation pattern to the other special variation pattern group, assuming that the specific condition is satisfied. Is switched to the first special variation pattern included in the game machine.

The following features are added to the gaming machine of this solution.
(1) The first special variation pattern includes a plurality of special variation pattern groups (special variation pattern tables) of different types. For example, the first special variation pattern includes a first special variation pattern group A and a first special variation pattern B, and the first special variation pattern group A and the first special variation pattern B include a plurality of first special variation patterns. Special variation patterns are included.

(2) In the special section, a plurality of special variation pattern groups are used in a predetermined order according to the number of variations after the special game. For example, when the number of changes after special game is “1-5”, the first special variation pattern group A is used, and when the number of changes after special game is “6-10”, the first special variation pattern group B is used. The first special variation pattern group A is used when the number of variations after special game is “11 to 20”, and the first special variation pattern group B is used when the number of variations after special game is “21 or more”. And so on.

(3) When a situation occurs in which one special variation pattern group (first special variation pattern group A) is switched to another special variation pattern group (first special variation pattern group B) among a plurality of special variation pattern groups. Assuming that the specific release condition is satisfied, the selectable variation pattern is switched from the second special variation pattern to the first special variation pattern included in another special variation pattern group (first special variation pattern group B).

  Thus, according to this solution, when switching from the second special fluctuation pattern to the first special fluctuation pattern, among the plurality of special fluctuation pattern groups, other special fluctuation pattern groups to be originally used. It is switched to (first special variation pattern group B).

  For this reason, even if the special variation by the second special variation pattern is temporarily performed, when the selection of the second special variation pattern is finished, the reference destination of the special variation pattern group is another special variation pattern group ( Since it is the first special variation pattern group B), the special variation as intended in advance can be continued.

  Solution 6: The gaming machine of the present solution is any one of Solution 1 to 5, wherein the post-special-game fluctuation count counting means for counting the post-special-game fluctuation count and the post-special-game fluctuation count counting means Separately, it comprises a variation count counting means after special game that counts the number of variations after the special game, the variation pattern switching means, when the count value of the variation count counting means after the special game has reached a predetermined switching value, The gaming machine is characterized in that the variation pattern that can be selected by the variation pattern determining means is switched from the special variation pattern to the other variation pattern, assuming that the specific condition is satisfied.

The following features are added to the gaming machine of this solution.
(1) The number of changes after special game is counted.
(2) Apart from the counting of the number of fluctuations after special game in the above (1), the number of fluctuations after special game is counted. The counts (1) and (2) may be added or subtracted.

(3) When the count value of (1) reaches a predetermined switching value, the selectable variation pattern is switched from the special variation pattern to another variation pattern on the assumption that a specific release condition is satisfied. .

  In this way, according to the present solution, when the number of fluctuations after special game reaches a predetermined switching value set in advance, the selectable fluctuation pattern is switched from the special fluctuation pattern to another fluctuation pattern. The change pattern switching process can be executed with simple control by simply monitoring the number of changes after the game.

  Solution 7: The gaming machine of the present solution executes the change display effect corresponding to the change display of the symbol by the symbol display means within the change time in any of the solution means 1 to 6, and then A symbol effect executing means for executing a stop display effect corresponding to the symbol stop display by the display means, a winning result is obtained in the internal lottery, and the winning type determining means determines the first special type or the first When it is determined that it falls under two special types, it further comprises reach effect execution means for executing reach effect during execution of the variable display effect by the symbol effect execution means, and the special game execution means The special game is executed after the end, and the variation pattern selecting means is configured to determine the special section after the end of the special game executed after the end of the reach effect. A game machine, characterized in that the dynamic pattern determining means selects said particular variation pattern as a possible variation pattern selection.

The following features are added to the gaming machine of this solution.
(1) A change display effect (effect effect scroll effect) using an effect symbol is executed within the symbol change time, and an effect symbol stop display effect is executed within the symbol stop display time.
(2) When the winning result is obtained in the internal lottery and it is determined that it falls under the special type (when it corresponds to the small hit), the reach effect is executed during the execution of the variable display effect of (1) above. The

(3) A special game is executed after the end of the reach effect in (2).
(4) For the special section after the end of the special game (3) executed after the end of the reach effect (2), the selectable variation pattern is restricted to the special variation pattern.

As described above, according to the present solution, the change pattern that can be selected by using the reach change as a trigger can be switched by setting the change in the case of the special win type (in the case of the small hit) to reach change. it can.
Even if the fluctuation pattern is switched to the special fluctuation pattern in response to the reach fluctuation, if a specific release condition is subsequently satisfied (for example, the 20th fluctuation, the 50th fluctuation, the 100th fluctuation, etc., which are the specific number of fluctuations) In the case of arrival, the special variation can be terminated and the original variation pattern selection table can be restored.

  According to the present invention, since an unprecedented variation pattern switching method is employed, a novel game characteristic can be exhibited.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows a game board unit independently. It is a front view which expands and shows a part of game board unit. It is a block diagram which shows the various electronic devices with which the pachinko machine was equipped. It is a front view which shows the periphery of a prize port unit. It is a figure explaining behavior of a game ball in the circumference of a prize mouth unit. It is a perspective view which shows the circumference | surroundings of a winning opening unit except a part of transparent decoration member. It is a figure for demonstrating the detail of the variable start winning device 28 and the 1st variable winning device 30. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the detail of the variable start winning device 28 and the 1st variable winning device 30. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the detail of the 2nd variable prize-winning apparatus 31. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the detail of the 2nd variable prize-winning apparatus 31. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the detail of the 2nd variable prize-winning apparatus 31. FIG. It is sectional drawing which shows the opening part periphery provided in the upstream of the collection | recovery channel | path 31c. It is a figure for demonstrating behavior of the game ball which flows into the collection | recovery channel | path 31c. It is a figure for demonstrating behavior of the game ball which flows into the collection | recovery channel | path 31c. It is a perspective view which shows the periphery of the storage apparatus 31t. It is a disassembled perspective view explaining the storage apparatus 31t. It is a disassembled perspective view explaining the storage apparatus 31t. It is a disassembled perspective view explaining the storage apparatus 31t. It is a figure explaining the operation example of the storage apparatus 31t. It is a figure explaining the operation example of the storage apparatus 31t. It is a figure explaining the operation example of the storage apparatus 31t. It is a flowchart (1/2) which shows the example of a procedure of a reset start process. It is a flowchart (2/2) which shows the example of a procedure of a reset start process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a power-off occurrence check process concretely. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of an interruption management process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a switch input event process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a 1st special symbol memory update process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a 2nd special symbol memory update process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the production | presentation determination process at the time of acquisition. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of a special symbol game process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the special symbol change pre-processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern selection table N at the time of loss | disconnection (low probability non-time shortening state). It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern selection table A (low-probability time reduction state) at the time of loss. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern selection table B at the time of disconnection (low probability time shortening state). It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern selection table C at the time of loss | disconnection (low probability time reduction state). It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern selection table D at the time of loss (high probability time reduction state). It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern selection table E (high probability time shortening state) at the time of loss. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern selection table F at the time of loss | disconnection (high probability time reduction state). It is a figure which shows the structure row | line | column of the 1st special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table. It is a figure which shows the structure column of the 2nd special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of the big hit hour fluctuation pattern selection table N (low probability non-time shortening state). It is a figure which shows an example of the big hit hour fluctuation pattern selection table A (low probability time reduction state). It is a figure which shows an example of the big hit hour fluctuation pattern selection table D (high probability time reduction state). It is a figure which shows the structural example of the stop symbol selection table at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a special symbol memory | storage area shift process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the special symbol stop display process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a fluctuation pattern selection table selection counter update process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a fluctuation pattern selection table setting process. It is a figure which shows an example of the switching fluctuation number table A (low probability time reduction state). It is a figure which shows an example of the switching fluctuation number table B (high probability time reduction state). It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of a display output management process. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of a big win time variable winning apparatus management process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a big winning opening big opening opening pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the big winning opening big opening / closing operation | movement process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the big winning prize closing opening process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the end process at the time of big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the fluctuation pattern selection table setting process at the time of jackpot end. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of the variable winning device management process at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the big winning opening opening pattern setting process at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the big winning opening opening / closing operation | movement process at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the big winning opening closing process at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the end process at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the fluctuation pattern selection table setting process at the time of a small hit end. It is a figure which shows an example of the switching section confirmation table at the time of a small hit end. It is a figure which shows an example of the example of a change of a fluctuation pattern selection table. It is a figure explaining the game flow developed in the pachinko machine 1. FIG. It is a continuation figure showing an example of a production picture corresponding to change display and stop display of a special symbol. It is a continuous figure which shows the flow of the reach production performed at the time of big hit (winning) at the time of corresponding to "10 round normal symbol" etc. FIG. 10 is a continuous diagram partially showing an example of the effect of a big role effect that is executed when it corresponds to “10 round normal symbol” or the like (1/11). It is a continuous figure which shows partially the example of the production | presentation of the big role production performed when it corresponds to "10 round normal symbol" etc. (2/11). It is a continuous figure which shows partially the example of the production | presentation of the big role production performed when it corresponds to "10 round normal symbol" etc. (3/11). It is a continuous figure which shows partially the example of the production | presentation of the big role production performed when it corresponds to "10 round normal symbol" etc. (4/11). It is a continuous figure which shows partially the example of the production | presentation of the big role production performed when it corresponds to "10 round normal symbol" etc. (5/11). It is a continuous figure which shows partially the example of the production | presentation of the big role production performed when it corresponds to "10 round normal symbol" etc. (6/11). It is a continuous figure which shows partially the example of the production | presentation of the big role production performed when it corresponds to "10 round normal symbol" etc. (7/11). It is a continuous figure which shows partially the example of the production | presentation of the big role production performed when it corresponds to "10 round normal symbol" etc. (8/11). It is a continuous figure which shows partially the example of the production | presentation of the big role production performed when it corresponds to "10 round normal symbol" etc. (9/11). It is a continuous figure which shows partially the example of the production | presentation of the big role production performed when it corresponds to "10 round normal symbol" etc. (10/11). It is a continuation figure which shows partially the example of the production of the big role production performed when it corresponds to "10 round normal symbol" etc. (11/11). It is a continuation figure showing the example of an effect of battle mode. It is a continuation figure which shows the example of the production performed at the time of winning in the battle mode, or at the time of losing (1/4). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of the presentation performed at the time of winning in a battle mode, or a gap (2/4). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of the presentation performed at the time of winning in a battle mode, or a gap (3/4). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of the presentation performed at the time of winning in a battle mode, or a gap (4/4). It is a continuation figure which shows in part an example of the big role production performed during the big hit game when it corresponds to "16 round probability variation 3". It is a continuation figure which shows the example of the production performed at the time of winning in the runaway mode or at the time of losing (1/7). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of the production performed at the time of winning in the escape mode, or when it is off (2/7). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of the presentation performed at the time of winning in the escape mode, or when it is off (3/7). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of the presentation performed at the time of winning in the escape mode, or when it is off (4/7). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of the presentation performed at the time of winning in the escape mode, or when it is off (5/7). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of the production performed at the time of winning in the escape mode or when it is off (6/7). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of the presentation performed at the time of winning in the escape mode, or when it is off (7/7). It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of effect control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of an operation | movement memory production | presentation management process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of effect design management processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of an effect design change pre-process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a big hit hour variation production pattern selection process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the fluctuation | variation effect pattern selection process at the time of loss. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of a process at the time of variable winning apparatus operation | movement. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a variable winning apparatus operation | movement pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a normal jackpot production | presentation setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the fluctuation pattern selection table setting process at the time of jackpot completion in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the fluctuation pattern selection table selection counter update process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the fluctuation pattern selection table setting process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the switching fluctuation number table A (low probability time shortening state) in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the switching fluctuation number table B (high probability time reduction state) in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the variation pattern selection table setting process at the time of the small hits end in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the switching section confirmation table at the time of the end of small hits in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the example of a change of the fluctuation pattern selection table in 2nd Embodiment.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter abbreviated as “pachinko machine”) 1. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 uses a game ball as a game medium, and a player borrows a game ball from a game hall operator to play a game with the pachinko machine 1. In the game of the pachinko machine 1, each game ball is a medium having a game value, and a privilege (profit) that the player enjoys as a result of the game is, for example, a game ball acquired by the player Based on the number of games, it can be converted into a game value. Hereinafter, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2.

〔overall structure〕
The pachinko machine 1 mainly includes an outer frame unit 2, an integrated door unit 4, and an inner frame assembly 7 (a plastic frame, a gaming machine frame) as its main body. The integrated door unit 4 is located on the foremost side when viewed from the front facing the player. An inner frame assembly 7 is located on the back side (back side) of the integrated door unit 4, and the outer frame unit 2 is disposed so as to surround the outer side of the inner frame assembly 7.

  The outer frame unit 2 is a structure in which wood and metal materials are combined in a vertically long rectangular shape. The outer frame unit 2 has a fastener such as a screw attached to an island facility (not shown) in the game hall. It is used and fixed. In the vertically long rectangular outer frame unit 2, wood is used for a portion corresponding to the upper and lower short sides, and a metal material is used for a portion corresponding to the left and right long sides.

  The integrated door unit 4 has a structure in which the tray unit 6 is integrated at a lower position thereof. The integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are attached to the island facility via the outer frame unit 2, and these operate in an openable manner via a hinge mechanism (not shown). An opening / closing axis of a hinge mechanism (not shown) extends in the vertical direction along the left end as viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1.

  A unified lock unit 9 is provided on the inner side of the right edge (the left edge in FIG. 2) of the inner frame assembly 7 when viewed from the front in FIG. Correspondingly, a locking tool (not shown) is also provided on the right side edge (back side) of the integrated door unit 4 and the outer frame unit 2. As shown in FIG. 1, in the state where the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are closed with respect to the outer frame unit 2, the unified lock unit 9 on the back side of the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly together with the locking device. 7 cannot be opened.

  A cylinder lock 6 a with a key hole is provided on the right edge of the tray unit 6. For example, when an administrator of the game hall inserts a dedicated key into the keyhole and twists the cylinder lock 6a clockwise, the unified lock unit 9 operates and the integrated door unit 4 can be opened together with the inner frame assembly 7. . If these are opened from the outer frame unit 2 to the front side (moved like a door), the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is exposed on the front side.

  On the other hand, when the cylinder lock 6a is twisted counterclockwise, only the locking of the integrated door unit 4 is released while the inner frame assembly 7 remains locked, and the integrated door unit 4 can be opened. When the integrated door unit 4 is opened to the front side, the game board unit 8 is directly exposed, and in this state, the manager of the game hall can remove obstacles such as ball clogging in the board surface. Further, when the integrated door unit 4 is opened, the tray unit 6 is also opened to the front side together.

  The pachinko machine 1 includes the game board unit 8 described above as a game unit. The game board unit 8 is supported by the inner frame assembly 7 behind (inside) the integrated door unit 4. The game board unit 8 can be attached to and detached from the inner frame assembly 7 with the integrated door unit 4 opened to the front side, for example. The integrated door unit 4 is formed with a vertically oval window 4a at the center thereof, and a glass unit (no reference numeral) is attached in the window 4a. The glass unit is a combination of, for example, two transparent plates (glass plates) cut in accordance with the shape of the window 4a. The glass unit is attached to the back side of the integrated door unit 4 via a fixture (not shown). A game area 8a (board surface, game board) is formed on the front surface of the game board unit 8, and this game area 8a is visible to the player from the front side through the window 4a. When the integrated door unit 4 is closed, a space in which a game ball can flow down is formed between the inner surface of the glass unit and the board surface.

  The saucer unit 6 has a shape protruding from the integrated door unit 4 to the front side as a whole, and an upper plate 6b is formed on the upper surface thereof. The upper plate 6b can store a game ball (rental ball) lent to a player and a game ball (prize ball) acquired by winning a prize. In the tray unit 6, a lower plate 6c is formed at a lower position of the upper plate 6b. The lower tray 6c stores game balls that are further paid out when the upper tray 6b is full. The pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is a so-called CR machine (model connected to the CR unit), and the game balls borrowed by the player are separated from the payout unit 172 on the back side separately from the prize balls. It is paid out to the dish 6b or the lower dish 6c).

  A lending operation unit 14 is provided on the upper surface of the tray unit 6, and a ball lending button 10 and a return button 12 are arranged on the lending operation unit 14. When a player operates the ball lending button 10 with a valuable medium (for example, a magnetic recording medium, a storage IC built-in medium, etc.) inserted in a CR unit (not shown), the number corresponding to a predetermined frequency unit (for example, 5 degrees). (For example, 125) game balls are lent out. For this reason, a frequency display unit (not shown) is arranged on the upper surface of the lending operation unit 14, and the remaining frequency of the valuable medium put in the CR unit is displayed on this frequency display unit. The player can receive the return of the valuable medium with the remaining frequency by operating the return button 12. Although the CR machine is taken as an example in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 may be a cash machine (a model not connected to the CR unit) different from the CR machine.

  Further, on the upper surface of the tray unit 6, an upper dish ball removal button 6d is provided in front of the upper dish 6b in the upper position, and a lower dish ball removal lever 6e is provided in the center of the lower dish 6c. Is installed. The player can cause the game balls stored in the upper plate 6b to flow down to the lower plate 6c by, for example, pressing the upper plate ball removing button 6d. Also, the player can drop the game balls stored in the lower plate 6c downward and discharge them by sliding the lower plate ball removal lever 6e to the left, for example. The discharged game ball is received by, for example, a ball receiving box (not shown).

  A handle unit 16 is installed on the lower right side of the tray unit 6. The player operates the handle unit 16 to operate the launch control board set 174 and can launch (shoot) a game ball toward the game area 8a (ball launcher). The launched game ball rises from the lower edge portion of the game board unit 8 along the left edge portion, is guided by an outer band (not shown), and is thrown into the game area 8a. A large number of obstacle nails, windmills (without reference numerals in the drawing) and the like are arranged in the game area 8a, and the thrown-in game balls flow down in the game area 8a while being guided and guided by the obstacle nails and the windmill. The configuration of the game area 8a (board surface, game board) will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

[Configuration of the front of the frame]
The integrated door unit 4 is provided with a left top lens unit 47 and an upper right illumination unit 49 as components for production. Among these, the left top lens unit 47 incorporates a glass frame top lamp 46 and a left glass frame decoration lamp 48, and the upper right electrical decoration unit 49 incorporates a right glass frame decoration lamp 50. In addition, left and right glass frame decoration lamps 52 are installed in the integrated door unit 4 so as to be connected to the lower part of the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right illumination unit 49, respectively. It extends from the left and right edges of the integrated door unit 4 to the front surface of the tray unit 6. In the integrated door unit 4, the glass frame top lamp 46 and the left and right glass frame decoration lamps 48, 50, and 52 are arranged so as to surround the glass unit.

  The various lamps 46, 48, 50, and 52 described above perform effects by, for example, the light emission of the built-in LEDs (lighting and blinking, change in luminance gradation, change in color tone, etc.). In addition, on the upper part of the integrated door unit 4, speakers on the glass frame 54 and 55 are incorporated in the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right illumination unit 49, respectively. On the other hand, an outer frame speaker 56 is incorporated in the lower left position of the outer frame unit 2. These speakers 54, 55, and 56 output sound effects, BGM, voice, etc. (sound in general) and execute effects.

  In addition, an effect switching button 45 is installed in the center of the tray unit 6 at a position in front of the upper plate 6b. The effect switching button 45 has, for example, a combination of a push-type circular button and a rotary jog ring (jog dial) around it. The player switches the contents of the effect (for example, the background screen displayed on the liquid crystal display 42) by pushing or rotating the effect switching button 45, or during the change of the symbol, the display of the big hit, or the like During the big hit game, some kind of effect (notice effect, probability change promotion effect, promotion effect while playing a big role, etc.) can be generated.

[Configuration on the back side]
As shown in FIG. 2, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, there are a power supply control unit 162, a main control board unit 170, a dispensing device unit 172, a flow path unit 173, a launch control board set 174, and a dispensing control board unit 176. A back cover unit 178 and the like are installed. In addition, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, various electronic devices (including a control computer not shown) constituting the power supply system and control system of the pachinko machine 1, an external terminal board 160, a power cord (power plug) 164, A ground wire (ground terminal) 166, connection wiring (not shown), and the like are installed.

  The payout device unit 172 includes, for example, a prize ball tank 172a and a prize ball case (no reference symbol), and the prize ball tank 172a is installed on the upper edge (back side) of the inner frame assembly 7. In this state, game balls replenished from a replenishment route (not shown) can be stored. The game balls stored in the prize ball tank 172a are guided to a prize ball case through an upper prize ball basket (not shown). The flow path unit 173 guides the game ball sent out from the payout unit 172 toward the tray unit 6 on the front side.

  The external terminal board 160 is used for connecting the pachinko machine 1 to an external electronic device (for example, a data display device, a hall computer, etc.). Various external information signals (for example, award ball information, door opening information, symbol determination number information, jackpot information, start opening information, etc.) indicating the progress state and maintenance state are output to an external electronic device. ing.

  The power cord 164 secures a power source (electric power) necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 1 by being connected to, for example, a power source device (for example, AC 24V) installed in an island facility of a game arcade. In addition, the ground wire 166 is connected to a ground terminal that is also installed in the island facility, thereby securing the ground (ground) of the pachinko machine 1.

  FIG. 3 is a front view showing the game board unit 8 alone. The game board unit 8 includes a game board 8b serving as a base, and a game area 8a is formed on the front side of the game board 8b. The game board 8b is made of, for example, a transparent resin plate. With the game board unit 8 fixed to the inner frame assembly 7, the front surface of the game board 8b is parallel to the glass unit. On the front surface of the game board 8b, the above-described game area 8a is formed inside a launch rail (not indicated by reference numeral) installed in a substantially circular shape.

  In the game area 8a, a relatively large effect unit 40 is arranged at the center position, and the game area 8a is largely divided into a left part, a right part and a lower part with the effect unit 40 as the center. The left part of the game area 8a is a first game area (left-handed area) used in a normal game state (low probability non-time shortened state), and the right part of the game area 8a is an advantageous game state (big hit game state) , A second game area (right-handed area) used in a small hit game state, a low probability time shortened state, a high probability time shortened state, and the like. Further, in the game area 8a, a middle start winning opening 26, a starting gate 20, a normal winning opening 22, 24, a variable starting winning apparatus 28, a first variable winning apparatus 30, and a second variable winning apparatus are provided around the effect unit 40. 31 etc. are distributed and installed.

  Among these, the middle start winning opening 26 is arranged at the center of the lower portion of the game area 8a, and the start gate 20, the second variable winning apparatus 31, the first variable winning apparatus 30, and the variable start winning apparatus 28 are arranged in the gaming area. They are arranged in this order from the top on the right side of 8a. Further, the three left normal winning holes 22 are arranged in the left part of the game area 8a, and the one right normal winning hole 24 is arranged in the right part of the game area 8a. The variable start winning device 28 is decorated with “1st” decoration, the first variable winning device 30 is decorated with “2nd” decoration, and the second variable winning device 31 has The surrounding area is decorated with “3rd”.

  The game ball thrown into the game area 8a passes through the start gate 20 in the process of flowing down, enters the medium start winning port 26, the normal winning ports 22, 24, or variable start at the time of operation. The player enters the winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30 during the opening operation, and the second variable winning device 31 during the opening operation. Here, there is a possibility that game balls flowing down the left area of the game area 8 a mainly enter the middle start winning opening 26 or enter the normal winning opening 22. On the other hand, the game balls flowing down the right area of the game area 8a mainly pass through the start gate 20, enter the variable start winning device 28 during operation, or enter the first variable winning device 30 during opening operation. There is a possibility that the player enters a ball, enters the second variable winning device 31 during the opening operation, or enters the normal winning port 24.

  The game balls that have passed through the start gate 20 continue to flow down in the game area 8a, but the medium start winning port 26, the normal winning ports 22, 24, the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device. The game balls that have entered the device 31 are collected to the back side of the game board unit 8 through through holes formed in the game board (plywood material, transparent board, etc. constituting the game board unit 8).

  Of these, the game balls that have entered the first variable winning device 30 are collected to the back side of the game board unit 8 after passing through the transparent collection passage 30c, and the game balls that have entered the second variable winning device 31 are Then, after passing through the transparent collection passage 31c, it is collected to the back side of the game board unit 8.

  Here, in the present embodiment, due to the configuration of the game area 8a (the board surface), when a game ball is to enter the middle start winning opening 26 or the normal winning opening 22, an area on the left side in the game area 8a (left-handed) It is necessary to drive a game ball into the area (so-called “left-handed” is executed).

  On the other hand, when a game ball is to be placed in the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, or the normal winning port 24, the right side region (right-handed region) in the game region 8a. ) To play a game ball (perform so-called “right-handed”).

  The variable start winning device 28 operates when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied (when a normal symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined stop display time in a winning manner), and accordingly, a right start winning port ( Enables entry into (without reference sign) (ordinary electric accessory). The variable start winning device 28 has, for example, one open / close member 28b, and this open / close member 28b reciprocates in the left-right direction along the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. That is, as shown by a dotted line in FIG. 3, one open / close member 28b is in the closed position (closed position) with the tip facing upward, and at this time, it is impossible to enter the right start winning opening (game) (There is no gap where the ball can enter). On the other hand, when the variable start winning device 28 is operated, the opening / closing member 28b is displaced (expanded) from the closed position toward the open position, and the right opening winning opening is opened by expanding the opening width on the right side. During this time, the variable start winning device 28 is in a state in which a game ball can enter, and can enter the right start winning opening (variable start winning means). At this time, the opening / closing member 28b also functions as a member that guides the entry of the game ball into the right start winning opening. In addition, the arrangement of the obstacle nails installed in the game board unit 8 is basically an aspect that does not extremely impede the flow of the game ball toward the variable start winning device 28 (the right start winning opening at the time of opening). However, the game ball does not necessarily enter the variable start winning device 28 (right start winning port) during the opening operation, but the balls are generated randomly.

  The first variable winning device 30 described above is a predetermined first condition (from the first round of the jackpot game) when the prescribed condition is satisfied (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode other than non-winning). It operates when the condition of the 10th round) is satisfied, and allows the player to enter the first grand prize opening (no reference sign) (special electric accessory, first special prize event generating means).

  The first variable winning device 30 is a device disposed above the variable start winning device 28 and has, for example, one opening / closing member 30a. The opening / closing member 30a reciprocates in the left-right direction with respect to the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. As shown in the drawing, one opening / closing member 30a is in a closed position (closed position) with its tip facing upward, and at this time, it is impossible to enter the first big prize opening (there is no gap for a game ball to enter). State). On the other hand, when the first variable winning device 30 is operated, the opening / closing member 30a is displaced (expanded) from the closed position to the open position, and the opening width is enlarged on the right side to open the first big prize opening. During this time, the first variable winning device 30 is in a state in which a game ball can be entered, and can enter the first big winning opening (variable winning means). At this time, the opening / closing member 30a also functions as a member that guides the entry of the game ball into the first grand prize opening. In addition, the arrangement of the obstacle nails installed in the game board unit 8 is basically an aspect that does not extremely impede the flow of the game ball toward the first variable winning device 30 (the first big winning opening at the time of opening). However, the game ball does not necessarily enter the first variable prize-winning device 30 during the opening operation, and the ball is generated randomly.

  The second variable winning device 31 described above has a predetermined second condition (the 16th round from the 11th round of the jackpot game) when the prescribed condition is satisfied (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a winning manner). It is activated when the condition (eye condition) is satisfied, and allows the player to enter the second big prize opening (no reference sign) (special electric accessory, second special prize event generating means).

  The second variable winning device 31 is a device arranged above the first variable winning device 30, and has, for example, one opening / closing member 31a. The opening / closing member 31a reciprocates in the left-right direction with respect to the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. As shown in the drawing, one open / close member 31a is in a closed position (closed position) with its tip facing upward, and at this time, it is impossible to enter the second big prize opening (there is no gap for a game ball to enter). State). On the other hand, when the second variable winning device 31 is operated, the opening / closing member 31a is displaced (expanded) from the closed position toward the open position, and the opening width is enlarged on the right side to open the second big prize opening. During this time, the second variable winning device 31 is in a state in which a game ball can be entered, and can enter the second big winning opening (variable winning means). At this time, the opening / closing member 31a also functions as a member that guides the entry of the game ball into the second grand prize opening. In addition, the arrangement of the obstacle nails installed in the game board unit 8 is basically an aspect that does not extremely impede the flow of the game ball toward the second variable winning device 31 (the second big winning opening at the time of opening). However, the game ball does not necessarily enter the second variable winning device 31 at the time of the opening operation, and the ball is generated randomly.

  In the game board unit 8, the effect unit 40 is installed from the center position to the right side portion. The production unit 40 has an upper edge portion 40a that functions as a guide member that changes the flow direction of the game ball, and includes various decorative parts 40b and 40c on the inside thereof. The decorative parts 40b and 40c can enhance the decorativeness of the game board unit 8 by three-dimensional modeling, and can perform a stunning operation by emitting transmitted light from, for example, a built-in light emitter (LED or the like). . In addition, a liquid crystal display 42 (image display) is installed inside the effect unit 40, and various effect images are displayed on the liquid crystal display 42, including effect symbols corresponding to special symbols. . In this way, the game board unit 8 impresses the player with the characteristics of the pachinko machine 1 based on the configuration of the board surface and the decorativeness of the effect unit 40. Further, when the game board 8b is a transparent resin board (for example, an acrylic board) as in the present embodiment, various decorative bodies (including a movable body and a light emitting body) arranged not only on the front side but also behind the game board 8b. ) Can be added.

  In addition, a drive source (for example, a motor, a solenoid, or the like) is attached to the interior of the effect unit 40 together with a movable body 40f for effect (for example, a decorative object having a logo type portion reminiscent of the pachinko machine 1). The effect movable body 40f can execute an effect accompanied by an operation of a tangible object in addition to an effect using an image by the liquid crystal display 42 and an effect by a light emitter. Due to the effects using these movable bodies 40f, appealing power different from the effects using two-dimensional images can be exhibited.

  In addition, a ball guide passage 40d is formed at the left edge of the effect unit 40, and a rolling stage 40e is formed at the lower edge thereof. The ball guide passage 40d is opened obliquely upward to the left in the game area 8a. When a game ball flowing down in the game area 8a randomly flows into the ball guide path 40d, it passes through the inside and rolls. Released onto the stage 40e. The upper surface of the rolling stage 40e has a smooth curved surface. Here, the game ball can roll in the left-right direction. The game ball that has rolled on the rolling stage 40e will eventually flow into the lower game area 8a. A ball discharge path 40k is formed at the center position of the rolling stage 40e, and the game ball guided from the rolling stage 40e to the ball discharge path 40k easily flows into the middle start winning opening 26 just below the ball discharge path 40k. .

  In addition, an out port 32 is formed in the game area 8 a, and game balls that have not entered (winned) in various winning ports are finally collected through the out port 32 to the back side of the game board unit 8. Also, the normal winning ports 22, 24, the middle starting winning port 26, the variable starting winning device 28 (right starting winning port), the first variable winning device 30 (first big winning port), and the second variable winning device 31 (second All game balls that have been driven into the game area 8a, including the game balls that have entered the big prize opening), are collected to the back side of the game board unit 8. The collected game balls are discharged out of the frame from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 through an out passage assembly (not shown), and further join a supply path of an island facility (not shown).

  FIG. 4 is an enlarged front view showing a part of the game board unit 8 (lower left position in the window 4a). That is, the game board unit 8 is provided with a normal symbol display device 33 and a normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a at the lower left position in the window 4a, for example, as well as a first special symbol display device 34 and a second special symbol display device 35. And a game state display device 38 is provided. Among these, the normal symbol display device 33, for example, turns on two lamps (LEDs) alternately to display the normal symbols variably, and stops and displays the normal symbols when the lamps are turned on or off. The normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a displays 0 to 4 memory numbers depending on, for example, a combination of turning off, lighting, or blinking of two lamps (LEDs). For example, in a display mode in which both lamps are extinguished, a memory number of 0 is displayed, in a display mode in which one lamp is lit, a memory number of 1 is displayed, and in a display mode in which the same one lamp is blinked. In the display mode in which two stored numbers are displayed, and in addition to blinking one lamp, the other lamp is lit, three stored numbers are displayed, and in the display mode in which the two lamps are flashed together, the stored number is four. For example, the individual is displayed. Here, although two lamps (LEDs) are used here, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a may be configured using four lamps (LEDs). In this case, the number of working memories can be displayed by the number of lamps to be lit.

  The normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a changes to the display mode after being incremented one by one in the sense of memorizing the occurrence of an operation lottery trigger each time a game ball passes through the start gate 20. Then, every time a change of the normal symbol is started with the passage (up to 4) as a trigger, the display mode is changed by one by one. In this embodiment, when the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a is not lit (the number of memories is 0), the game ball passes through the start gate 20 in a state in which the normal symbol can already start to change (during stop display). However, the display mode does not change. That is, the memorized number (maximum 4) represented by the display mode of the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a represents the number of passages at which the variation of the normal symbol has not started yet.

  In addition, the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35 display, for example, a change state and a stopped state of the corresponding first special symbol or second special symbol by 7 segment LED (with dots), respectively. (Symbol display means). The first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35 may have a form in which a plurality of dot LEDs are arranged geometrically (for example, in a circular shape).

  Further, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a and the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a have 0 to 4 each, for example, depending on a display mode constituted by a combination of extinction or lighting and blinking of two lamps (LEDs). Is stored (memory number display means). For example, in a display mode in which both lamps are extinguished, a memory number of 0 is displayed, in a display mode in which one lamp is lit, a memory number of 1 is displayed, and in a display mode in which the same one lamp is blinked. In the display mode in which two stored numbers are displayed, and in addition to blinking one lamp, the other lamp is lit, three stored numbers are displayed, and in the display mode in which the two lamps are flashed together, the stored number is four. For example, the individual is displayed.

  The first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a is a display mode after being incremented one by one in the sense of storing that a game ball has entered the middle start winning port 26 every time a game ball flows into the middle start winning port 26. Each time the change of the special symbol is started with the entry of the ball, the display mode is decreased by one each time. The second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is incremented by one in the sense that each time a game ball enters the variable start winning device 28, it stores that the game ball has entered the right start winning port. It changes to the display mode (up to a maximum of 4), and changes to the display mode after being reduced one by one every time the change of the special symbol is started with the entry. In the present embodiment, when the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a is not lit (the number of memories is 0), the middle start winning opening 26 is in a state where the first special symbol can already start to change (when stopped). Even if a game ball enters, the display mode does not change. In addition, when the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is not lit (the number of memories is 0), a game ball enters the variable start winning device 28 in a state where the second special symbol can already start to change (when stopped). Even if it is a sphere, the display mode does not change. That is, the number of memories (maximum of 4) represented by the display mode of each special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, 35a is the number of incoming balls for which the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has not yet started. It represents the number of times.

  The game state display device 38 includes a plurality of LEDs corresponding to, for example, jackpot type display lamps 38a and 38b, a probability variation state display lamp 38d, a short time state display lamp 38e, and a launch position designation lamp 38f. In the present embodiment, the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, the first special symbol display device 34, the second special symbol display device 35, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, and the second special symbol are described. The symbol operation memory lamp 35a and the game state display device 38 are attached to the game board unit 8 in a state of being mounted on one integrated display board 89.

[Control configuration]
Next, a configuration related to control of the pachinko machine 1 will be described. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing various electronic devices equipped in the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 includes a main control device 70 (main control computer) that serves as the center of the control operation. The main control device 70 mainly has a function of controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1. Yes. The main controller 70 is built in the main control board unit 170 described above.

  The main controller 70 is equipped with a circuit board (main control board) on which a main control CPU 72 as a central processing unit is mounted. The main control CPU 72 includes a ROM 74, a RAM ( RWM) 76 and other semiconductor memories are integrated as an LSI. The main controller 70 is equipped with a random number generator 75 and a sampling circuit 77. Among these, the random number generator 75 generates a hardware random number (for example, 0 to 65535 in decimal notation) for the big symbol determination of the special symbol lottery or the normal symbol lottery, and the random number generated here is generated. Is input to the main control CPU 72 through the sampling circuit 77. In addition, the main controller 70 is equipped with peripheral ICs such as an input / output (I / O) port 79, a clock generation circuit (not shown), a counter / timer circuit (CTC), etc., and these are circuited together with the main control CPU 72. It is mounted on the board. A signal transmission path, a power supply path, a control bus, and the like are formed as wiring patterns on the circuit board (or the inner layer portion).

  The start gate 20 described above is integrally provided with a gate switch 78 for detecting the passage of a game ball. In addition, the game board unit 8 includes a medium start winning port 26, a variable start winning device 28, a first variable winning device 30, and a second variable winning device 31 corresponding to the middle start winning port switch 80 and the right start winning port, respectively. A switch 82, a first count switch 84, and a second count switch 85 are provided. The start winning port switches 80 and 82 are for detecting the entrance of a game ball into the middle start winning port 26 and the variable start winning device 28 (right start winning port). The first count switch 84 is for detecting the number of game balls that have entered the first variable prize-winning device 30 (first big prize opening) and counting the number thereof. Further, the second count switch 85 is for detecting the number of game balls that have entered the second variable prize-winning device 31 (second big prize opening) and counting the number thereof. Similarly, the game board unit 8 is equipped with a prize opening switch 86 for detecting the entry of game balls into the normal prize openings 22 and 24. Here, a configuration using a common winning opening switch 86 for all the normal winning openings 22 and 24 is given as an example, but for example, separate winning opening switches 86 are installed on the left and right sides of the board, and the left winning opening switch is provided. In 86, it is detected that a game ball has entered the normal winning port 22 located on the left side of the board, and in the right prize port switch 86, it is detected that a game ball has entered the normal winning port 24 located on the right side of the board. Also good.

  In any case, the winning detection signals of these switches 78 to 86 are input to the main control CPU 72 via an input / output driver (not shown). Note that due to the configuration of the game board unit 8, in this embodiment, the winning detection signals from the gate switch 78, the first count switch 84, the second count switch 85, and the winning opening switch 86 are passed through the panel relay terminal board 87. The panel relay terminal board 87 is provided with wiring patterns, connection terminals, and the like for relaying each winning detection signal.

  The above-mentioned normal symbol display device 33, normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, first special symbol display device 34, second special symbol display device 35, first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a and game The state display device 38 is controlled in display operation based on a control signal from the main control CPU 72. The main control CPU 72 outputs control signals for the display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and the lamps 33a, 34a, 35a according to the progress of the game, and controls the lighting state of each LED. The display devices 33, 34, 35, and 38 and the lamps 33a, 34a, and 35a are installed in the game board unit 8 in a state of being mounted on one integrated display board 89 as described above. A control signal is transmitted from the main control CPU 72 to the display substrate 89 through the panel relay terminal board 87.

  In addition, the game board unit 8 includes the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88, the first large prize opening solenoid 90, and the second large corresponding to the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device 31, respectively. A prize opening solenoid 97 is provided. These solenoids 88, 90, 97 operate (excited) based on a control signal from the main control CPU 72, and open / close operations (activate) the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device 31, respectively. Let Note that these solenoids 88, 90, 97 also transmit control signals from the main control CPU 72 via the panel relay terminal plate 87.

  In addition, a glass frame opening switch 91 is installed in the glass frame unit 4, and a plastic frame opening switch 93 is installed in the plastic frame assembly 7. When the glass frame unit 4 is opened alone, a contact signal from the glass frame opening switch 91 is input to the main controller 70 (main control CPU 72), and the plastic frame assembly 7 is opened from the outer frame assembly 2. Then, a contact signal from the plastic frame opening switch 93 is input to the main controller 70 (main control CPU 72). The main control CPU 72 can detect the open state of the glass frame unit 4 and the plastic frame assembly 7 from these contact signals. When the main control CPU 72 detects the open state of the glass frame unit 4 and the plastic frame assembly 7, the main control CPU 72 generates a door opening information signal as the external information signal.

  On the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a payout control device 92 is provided. The payout control device 92 (payout control computer) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 described above. The payout control device 92 is equipped with a circuit board (payout control board) on which a payout control CPU 94 is mounted. The payout control CPU 94 is also an LSI in which a semiconductor memory such as a ROM 96 and a RAM 98 is integrated together with a CPU core (not shown). It is configured. The payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 based on the prize ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, and executes the payout operation of the requested number of game balls. The main control CPU 72 generates a prize ball information signal as the above external information signal together with the prize ball instruction command.

  In a prize ball case (not shown) of the payout device unit 172, a payout device substrate 100 is installed together with a payout motor 102 (for example, a stepping motor). The payout device substrate 100 is provided with a drive circuit for the payout motor 102. Yes. The payout device substrate 100 specifically controls the rotation angle of the payout motor 102 based on the payout number instruction signal from the payout control device 92 (the payout control CPU 94), and pays out the designated number of game balls from the prize ball case. Let it come out. The paid-out game balls are sent to the tray unit 6 through the payout flow path in the flow path unit 173.

  Further, for example, a payout path ball cut switch 104 is installed at an upstream position of the prize ball case, and a payout counting switch 106 is installed at a downstream position of the payout motor 102. When a prize ball is actually paid out by driving the payout motor 102, a count signal from the payout count switch 106 is input to the payout device substrate 100 each time. Further, when a ball break occurs at an upstream position of the prize ball case, a contact signal from the payout path ball break switch 104 is input to the payout device substrate 100. The dispensing device substrate 100 transmits the input count signal and contact signal to the dispensing control device 92 (dispensing control CPU 94). The payout control CPU 94 can detect the actual payout number and the out-of-ball state based on the signal received from the payout device substrate 100.

  Further, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a full tank switch 161, for example, inside the lower plate 6c (the position of the bowl as viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1). The prize balls (game balls) that are actually paid out are discharged to the upper plate 6b through the flow path unit 173. When the upper plate 6b is full of game balls, As described above, it flows into the lower plate 6c. Further, when the lower plate 6c is filled with game balls, the full tank switch 161 is turned ON, and a full tank detection signal is input to the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94). In response to this, even if the payout control CPU 94 receives a prize ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, it temporarily suspends further prize ball operations, and stores the unpaid prize ball remaining number in the RAM 98. Note that the RAM 98 can be backed up even when the power is cut off, so that even if a power failure (including momentary power failure) occurs during the game, the information on the number of remaining unsold prize balls will not be lost. .

  Further, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a firing solenoid 110 is installed together with the launch control board 108. In addition, a ball feeding solenoid 111 is provided in the tray unit 6. The launch control board 108, the launch solenoid 110, and the ball feed solenoid 111 constitute the launch control board set 174 described above, and the launch control board 108 is provided with drive circuits for the launch solenoid 110 and the ball feed solenoid 111. ing. Among these, the ball feed solenoid 111 performs an operation of sending out the game balls stored in the tray unit 6 one by one to a predetermined launch position in the launcher case. Further, the launch solenoid 110 hits the game ball sent to the launch position, and performs an operation of continuously (intermittently) launching the game balls one by one toward the game area 8 as described above. Note that the game ball is fired at intervals of, for example, about 0.6 seconds (within 100 per minute).

  On the other hand, the grip unit 16 located on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a firing lever volume 112, a touch sensor 114, and a firing stop switch 116. Among these, the firing lever volume 112 generates an analog signal proportional to the operation amount (so-called stroke) of the firing handle by the player. The touch sensor 114 detects that the player's body is touching the grip unit 16 (launching handle) from the change in capacitance, and outputs a detection signal. The firing stop switch 116 generates a firing stop signal (contact signal) in accordance with the player's operation.

  The above receiving tray unit 6 is provided with a launch relay terminal plate 118, and each signal from the launch lever volume 112, the touch sensor 114, and the launch stop switch 116 is sent via the launch relay terminal plate 118. Sent to. The drive signal from the launch control board 108 is applied to the ball feed solenoid 111 via the launch relay terminal board 118. When the player operates the firing handle, an analog signal (which may be an encoded digital signal) is generated by the firing lever volume 112 according to the operation amount, and the firing solenoid 110 is driven based on the signal at this time. Thereby, the strength of launching a game ball is adjusted according to the operation amount of the player. The drive circuit of the firing control board 108 stops driving the firing solenoid 110 when the detection signal from the touch sensor 114 is off (low level) or when the firing stop signal is input from the firing stop switch 116. To do. In addition to this, the launch relay terminal plate 118 is connected with a lending device connection terminal plate 120 such as a game ball, and when the above-mentioned CR unit is not connected to this lending device connection terminal plate 120 such as a game ball, the launch is similarly performed. The drive circuit of the control board 108 stops driving the firing solenoid 110.

  The tray unit 6 includes a frequency display board 122 and a rental / return switch board 123. Of these, the frequency display board 122 is provided with the display of the frequency display unit (7-segment LED for 3 digits). In addition, switch modules connected to the ball lending button 10 and the return button 12 are mounted on the lending / return switch board 123, and when the ball lending button 10 or the return button 12 is operated, the operation signal is lended. And the return switch board 123 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 120 to the CR unit. Further, a frequency signal indicating the remaining frequency of the valuable medium is transmitted from the CR unit to the frequency display board 122 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 120. A display circuit (not shown) on the frequency display board 122 drives the display unit based on the frequency signal, and displays the remaining frequency of the valuable medium as a numerical value. In addition, when no valuable medium is inserted into the CR unit, or when the remaining frequency of the inserted valuable medium becomes zero, the display circuit of the frequency display board 122 drives the display to display a demonstration (value medium). Display for urging the user to input.

  Further, the pachinko machine 1 includes an effect control device 124 (effect control computer) as a control configuration. The effect control device 124 controls the effect accompanying the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1. The effect control device 124 is also equipped with a circuit board (composite sub-control board) on which an effect control CPU 126 that is a central processing unit is mounted. The effect control CPU 126 includes a CPU core (not shown) and a semiconductor memory such as a ROM 128 and a RAM 130 as a main memory. The production control device 124 is provided at a position covered with the back cover unit 178 on the back side of the pachinko machine 1.

  The effect control device 124 is equipped with an input / output driver (not shown) and various peripheral ICs, as well as a lamp drive circuit 132 and an acoustic drive circuit 134. The production control CPU 126 performs production control based on the production command transmitted from the main control CPU 72, and gives commands to the lamp driving circuit 132 and the acoustic driving circuit 134 to emit various lamps 46 to 52 and the panel lamp 53. Or a process of actually outputting sound effects, voices, and the like from the speakers 54, 55, and 56.

  The effect control device 124 and the main control device 70 are connected to each other via, for example, a communication harness (not shown). However, the communication between these is performed only in one direction from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, and communication in the reverse direction is not performed. The communication harness may adopt a parallel format according to the bus widths of various commands transmitted from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, and each driver IC (I / O). A serial format may be adopted according to the hardware configuration.

  The lamp driving circuit 132 includes a switching element such as a PWM (pulse width modulation) IC or a MOSFET (not shown). The lamp driving circuit 132 switches driving voltages (or duty switching) applied to various lamps including LEDs. ) And manage the operation such as light emission and flashing. In addition to the glass frame top lamps 46 and 48, the glass frame side lamp 50, and the tray lamp 52, the various lamps include a decoration / production board lamp 53 installed in the game board unit 8. The panel lamp 53 corresponds to an LED incorporated in the above-described effect unit, or an LED incorporated in the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, and the like. Here, although the example in which the saucer lamp 52 is connected to the glass frame decorating board 136 is given, a saucer illuminated board is installed in the saucer unit 6, and the saucer lamp 52 is interposed via the saucer illuminated board. It may be configured to be connected to the lamp driving circuit 132.

  The acoustic drive circuit 134 is, for example, a sound generator that includes a sound ROM, an acoustic control IC, an amplifier, and the like (not shown). The acoustic drive circuit 134 drives the upper speaker 54 and the lower speaker 56 to perform acoustic output. .

  In the present embodiment, a glass frame decoration board 136 is installed on the inner surface of the glass frame unit 4, and drive signals from the lamp drive circuit 132 and the acoustic drive circuit 134 pass through the glass frame decoration board 136 and various lamps 46. To 52 and speakers 54, 55, and 56. Also, the effect switching button 45 is connected to the glass frame decorating board 136, and when the player operates the effect switching button 45, the contact signal is sent to the effect control device 124 through the glass frame decorating board 136. Entered. Furthermore, the jog dial 45a is connected to the glass frame decorating board 136, and when the player rotates the jog dial 45a, the rotation signal is input to the effect control device 124 through the glass frame decorating board 136. . In addition, although the example which connected the effect switch button 45 and the jog dial 45a to the glass frame decor substrate 136 is given here, when the above-described saucer decor board is installed, the effect switch button 45 and the jog dial 45a are the saucer decor. It may be connected to the substrate.

  In addition, a panel board 138 is installed in the game board unit 8, and a movable body motor 57 is connected to the panel board 138 in addition to the panel lamp 53. The movable body motor 57 drives the movable body 40f via a link mechanism (not shown), for example. A drive signal from the lamp drive circuit 132 is applied to the panel lamp 53 and the movable body motor 57 via the panel illumination board 138, respectively.

  The liquid crystal display 42 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and the display screen is visible through a substantially rectangular opening formed in the game board unit 8. Further, an inverter board 158 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and the inverter board 158 generates an AC power source that is applied to a backlight (for example, a cold cathode tube) of the liquid crystal display 42. Further, an effect display control device 144 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and the display operation by the liquid crystal display 42 is controlled by the effect display control device 144. The effect display control device 144 is equipped with a display control CPU 146 that is a general-purpose central processing unit and a circuit board (effect display control board) on which a VDP 152 that is a display processor is mounted. Among these, the display control CPU 146 is configured as an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as a ROM 148 and a RAM 150 are integrated together with a CPU core (not shown). The VDP 152 is configured as an LSI in which a semiconductor core such as an image ROM 154 and a VRAM 156 is integrated with a processor core (not shown). The VRAM 156 can use a part of the storage area as a frame buffer.

  The ROM 128 of the effect control CPU 126 stores a basic program related to effect control, and the effect control CPU 126 executes effect control according to this program. The production control includes production control using various lamps 46 to 53 and speakers 54, 55, and 56 as described above, and production control by image display using the liquid crystal display 42. . The effect control CPU 126 transmits basic information (for example, effect number) related to the effect to the display control CPU 146, and the display control CPU 146 that receives the information transmits a specific effect image based on the basic information. Control the display.

  The display control CPU 146 outputs a more detailed control signal to the VDP 152. Receiving this, the VDP 152 accesses the image ROM 154 based on the control signal, reads necessary image data therefrom, and transfers it to the VRAM 156. Further, the VDP 152 expands the image data on the VRAM 156 for each frame (still image per unit time) in a frame buffer, and each pixel (full color pixel) of the liquid crystal display 42 is expanded based on the buffered image data. Drive individually.

  In addition, a power supply control unit 162 (power supply control means) is provided on the back side of the plastic frame assembly 7. The power supply control unit 162 has a built-in switching power supply circuit. When external power (for example, AC 24V) is taken from the island facility through the power cord 164, necessary power (for example, DC + 34V, + 12V) can be generated therefrom. The electric power generated by the power supply control unit 162 is distributed to the main control device 70, the payout control device 92, the effect control device 124, and the inverter board 158. Furthermore, power is supplied to the launch control board 108 via the payout control device 92, and power is supplied to the CR unit via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 120. The low voltage power for logic (for example, DC + 5V) is generated by a power supply IC (3-terminal regulator or the like) built in each device. Further, as described above, the power supply control unit 164 is grounded (grounded) to the island facility through the ground wire 166.

  The external terminal plate 160 is connected to the payout control device 92, and various external information signals generated by the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) pass through the payout control device 92 to the external terminal plate 160. Is output to the outside. The main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) and the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) can output an external information signal to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the external terminal board 160. The signals output from the external terminal board 160 are collected by, for example, a hall computer (not shown) in a game hall. Here, the configuration via the payout control device 92 is taken as an example, but a configuration in which an external information signal is directly output from the main control device 70 to the external terminal board 160 may be used.

  The above is a configuration example relating to the control of the pachinko machine 1. Subsequently, the configuration of the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, and the winning opening unit related thereto will be described. FIG. 6 is a front view showing the periphery of the winning opening unit.

[Winner unit]
As shown in FIG. 6, the winning opening unit includes a variable start winning device 28, a first variable winning device 30, and a second variable winning device 31. The variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device 31 are all provided in one base member 41z, and each of the decorative members 41a is used for teaching each position to the player. -41f are provided. Specifically, the variable start winning device 28 includes a decorative member 41e made of a transparent material and a decorative member 41f decorated with characters such as “1st”, and the opening / closing member 28b is provided between the decorative member 41e and the base member 41z. Is provided. The first variable winning device 30 disposed above the variable start winning device 28 includes a decorative member 41c made of a transparent material and a decorative member 41d decorated with characters such as “2nd”. An opening / closing member 30a is provided between the base members 41z. Similarly, the second variable winning device 31 disposed above the first variable winning device is provided with a decorative member 41a made of a transparent material and a decorative member 41b decorated with characters such as “3rd”, and the decorative member 41a. An opening / closing member 31a is provided between the base member 41b and the base member 41b.

  As described above, the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device 31 are configured as one winning port unit, and the opening / closing member, the wall surface member, the decorative member, and the like are made common. Therefore, three winning openings can be provided in parallel in the vertical direction, and the appearance of the game board can be bathed. In addition, the second variable winning device 31 is set to be more advantageous for the player than the first variable winning device 30 that is activated during the big hit game to give the player superiority or inferiority. Can do.

  Further, the first variable winning device 30 is provided with a collection passage 30c made of a transparent material for collecting the game balls that have entered the ball on the back side of the game board unit 8, and the second variable winning device 31 is the same. Is provided with a recovery passageway 31c. The collection passage 31c is provided on the back side of the decorative member 41x made of a transparent member provided in the rolling stage 40e.

FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining the behavior of the game ball in the vicinity of the prize opening unit, and FIG. 8 is a perspective view showing the vicinity of the prize opening unit excluding some transparent decorative members.
As shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, the game ball that has entered the variable start winning device 28 passes over the opening / closing member 28b, and is guided and opened by the wall surface member 28p provided between the base member 41z and the decorative member 41f. It enters the ball and is collected on the back side of the game board unit 8. The game ball after being guided into the opening by the wall surface member 28p passes through the back side of the LED board 41n for the variable start winning device 28, and is recovered as it is to the back side of the game board unit 8. Therefore, this means that the player can see the game ball passing on the opening / closing member 28b.

  On the other hand, the game ball that has entered the first variable winning device 30 passes over the opening / closing member 30a, is guided by the wall surface member 30p provided between the base member 41z and the decorative member 41d, and enters the opening to play the game. It is collected on the back side of the panel unit 8. Here, the game ball after being guided into the opening by the wall surface member 30p passes through the back side of the LED board 41m for the first variable prize-winning device 30, and then passes through the collection passage 30c to the game board unit 8. Collected on the back side. Therefore, the player can see the game ball passing over the opening / closing member 30a and the game ball passing through the collection passage 30c.

  Similarly, the game ball that has entered the second variable prize-winning device 31 passes over the opening / closing member 31a, is guided by the wall surface member 31p provided between the base member 41z and the decorative member 41b, and enters the opening. Collected on the back side of the game board unit 8. Here, the game ball after being guided into the opening by the wall surface member 31p passes through the back side of the LED board 41l for the second variable prize-winning device 31, and then passes through the collection passage 31c to the game board unit 8. Collected on the back side. Therefore, the player can see the game ball passing over the opening / closing member 31a and the game ball passing through the collection passage 31c. Further, the collection passage 31c provided in the second variable prize winning device 31 has a structure in which the distance in the passage is longer than the collection passage 30c provided in the first variable prize winning device 30, and the collection passage 30c is in the vertical direction. Is installed in the horizontal direction. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball passing through the collection passage 31c for a long time. In addition, since the collection passage 30c is located at the lower right lower portion of the game area 8a, the collection passage 31c is located at the center of the game area 8a, so that the player can further see the game ball passing through the collection passage 31c. It can be made easier.

  Further, the collection passage 31c provided in the second variable prize winning device 31 is located at the back side of the central opening position of the decorative member (non-transparent) 41y provided on the back side of the transparent decorative member 41x provided in the rolling stage 40e. The game ball passing through the collection passage 31c is released in a form of dropping downward from the central opening position of the decorative member 41y. The game balls released from the collection passage 31c are collected by a storage device 31t (not shown) and then collected on the back side of the game board unit 8. Accordingly, when the player releases the game ball 31c, the player cannot visually recognize the game ball.

  Here, as the types of jackpots, the 10th round jackpot and the 16th round jackpot are defined, and the first variable winning device 30 is operated up to the 1st to 10th rounds (satisfying a predetermined first condition), up to the 11th to 16th rounds. When the second variable winning device 31 is operated (when the predetermined second condition is satisfied), the big win that can win more prize balls is the 16 round big hit, so the second variable winning device in the big win game The player desires that 31 operates. And if the game ball is entered when the second variable prize winning device 31 is operating, it can pass through the collection passage 31c for a long time, so that it is not a normal big hit (10 round big hit). It is a big hit (16 rounds big hit), and it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that it is in a good state where a lot of winning balls can be obtained for 6 rounds, and a sense of superiority can be given. In addition, a recovery passageway 31c is provided at the lower part of the display screen, so that it is possible to enjoy the big hit effect being performed on the display screen while watching the game ball passing through the recovery passageway 31c. In the case of 10 rounds of big win (when the predetermined first condition is satisfied), only the first variable winning device 30 is operated, and in the case of 16 rounds of big win (when the predetermined second condition is satisfied) The same effect can be obtained when only the two variable winning device 31 is operated.

  Further, the position at which the game ball is discharged from the collection passage 31c (the central opening position of the decorative member 41y) is located directly above the middle start winning opening 26, and the game ball released from the collection passage 31c is The player can be reminded as if he entered the middle start winning opening 26.

[Variable start winning device 28 and first variable winning device 30]
9 and 10 are diagrams for explaining the details of the variable start winning device 28 and the first variable winning device 30. FIG.
As shown in FIG. 9, the back side of the base member 41z is provided with a normal electric accessory solenoid 88 as a power source of the variable start winning device 28 and a link mechanism 88l for transmitting the power from the solenoid to the opening / closing member 28b. An LED board 41q is provided above the opening / closing member 28b of the variable start winning device 28, and lighting control or the like is performed when the variable start winning device 28 is operated (opening / closing operation) together with the LED board 41n. In order to detect a game ball that has entered the variable start winning device 28, a right start winning port switch 82 is provided below the wall member 28p.

  Similarly, the first variable winning device 30 has a first large winning opening solenoid 90 as a power source of the first variable winning device 30 and a link mechanism 90l for transmitting the power from the opening and closing member 30a on the back side of the base member 41z. Is provided. In addition, an LED board 41p is provided on the upper part of the opening / closing member 30a of the first variable winning device 30, and lighting control or the like is performed when the first variable winning device 30 is operated (opening / closing operation) together with the LED board 41m. . Further, in order to detect a game ball that has entered the first variable winning device 30, a first count switch 84 is provided below the wall surface member 30p.

FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining details of the variable start winning device 28 and the first variable winning device 30 from the game board surface side.
As shown in FIG. 10, the game ball entering the first variable winning device 30 is guided by the opening / closing member 30a and the wall surface member 30p, and after passing through the first major winning port count switch 84, the inside of the collection passage 30c. It passes and is collected on the back side of the game board unit 8. The game balls entering the variable start winning device 28 are guided by the opening / closing member 28b and the wall surface member 28p, and after passing through the right start winning port switch 82, pass through the collection passage 28c and the game board unit 8. Collected on the back side. Here, the recovery passage 28c is provided adjacent to the recovery passage 30c, and is configured by the same first recovery passage member 30c1. In addition, each collection | recovery channel | path 28c and each collection | recovery channel | path 30c can be comprised by couple | bonding with the 2nd collection | recovery channel | path member (not shown) corresponding to the 1st collection | recovery channel | path member 30c1.

FIGS. 11 to 13 are diagrams for explaining the details of the second variable winning device 31.
As shown in FIG. 11, on the back side of the base member 41z, a second large prize opening solenoid 97 as a power source of the second variable prize winning device 31 and a link mechanism 97l for transmitting the power from the solenoid to the opening / closing member 31a are provided. . In addition, an LED board 41o is provided above the opening / closing member 31a of the second variable winning device 31, and lighting control or the like is performed when the second variable winning device 31 is operated (opening / closing operation) together with the LED substrate 41l. . In order to detect a game ball that has entered the second variable prize-winning device 31, a second count switch 85 is provided below the wall surface member 31p.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 12, the game ball that has passed through the second count switch 85 passes through the collection passage 31c. The recovery passage 31c is formed by coupling a first recovery passage member 31c1 (not shown) and a second recovery passage member 31c2. In addition, an opening is provided at a lower position of the second count switch 85 of the second collection passage member 31c2, and a discharge member 31e for discharging the game ball to the back side of the game board unit 8 is provided in the opening. Yes.

  As shown in FIG. 13, there may be a case where a predetermined number (for example, about 20) of game balls stays in the collection passage 31c. At that time, it becomes impossible for the game ball to enter the second variable winning device 31 that is operating, that is, it is disadvantageous for the player because a large amount of prize balls cannot be paid out to the player in a big hit game in a short time. It becomes a state. Therefore, an opening is provided upstream of the collection passage 31c, and the game ball after passing through the second count switch 85 is discharged from the discharge member 31e provided in the opening to the back side of the game board unit 8, thereby It is possible to enter the variable winning device 31.

FIG. 14 is a cross-sectional view showing the periphery of the opening provided upstream of the recovery passageway 31c.
As shown in FIG. 14, the first collection passage member 31c1 and the second collection passage member 31c2 are combined to form a collection passage 31c. A second count switch 85 is provided at the entrance of the collection passage 31c, and the collection is performed. An opening is provided in the second recovery passage member 31c2 upstream of the passage 31c. The collection passage 31c is provided with three guide ribs rx, ry, rz. The first guide rib rx and the third guide rib rz are provided on the first collection passage member 31c1, and the second guide. The rib ry is provided on the second collection passage member 31c2. The first guide rib rx is located in front of the opening of the second collection passage member 31c2, the second guide rib ry is located below the opening, and the third guide rib rz is more than the second guide rib ry. Located below.

Next, the structure about each guide rib and those periphery is demonstrated in detail.
The inner diameter (ra) of the second count switch 85 is about 11.7 mm, the first guide rib rx protrudes about 1 mm (rb) from the first recovery passage member 31c1, and the game ball passes through the second count switch 85. Thus, when falling, the first guide rib rx is hardly contacted. The second guide rib ry protrudes about 1.7 mm (rc) inward from the end of the inner diameter of the second count switch 85 and protrudes about 1 mm (rd) from the second collection passage member 31c2, so that the game ball is The structure is such that the second guide rib ry is likely to come into contact with the second guide rib ry when falling through the second count switch 85. The inner diameter of the recovery passage 31c formed by joining the first recovery passage member 31c1 and the second recovery passage 31c2 is about 13 mm (re). The third guide rib rz protrudes about 1 mm (rf) from the first collection passage member 31c1 similarly to the first guide rib rx. The opening of the second collection passage member 31 c 2 provided below the second count switch 85 has a height of about 21 mm (rh) and is gently inclined toward the back side of the game board unit 8.

  15 and 16 are diagrams for explaining the behavior of the game ball flowing into the collection passage 31c. As shown in FIG. 15, the game ball that has passed through the second count switch 85 contacts the second guide rib ry on the second recovery passage member 31c2, and the opening provided in the second recovery passage member 31c2 It will be guided to the collection passage 31c side without being guided. Therefore, unless a plurality of game balls are stored in the collection passage 31c or a ball clogging occurs, the game balls that have entered the second variable prize-winning device 31 come into contact with the second guide rib ry to collect the game balls. The player passes through the passage 31c, and the player can visually recognize the passage.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 16, when the game ball stays upstream of the collection passage 31c, the game ball that has passed through the second count switch 85 is discharged from the opening provided in the second collection passage member 31c2. It passes through the member 31e and is discharged to the back side of the game board unit 8. Specifically, when the game ball stays up to the upstream of the recovery passageway 31c, the third guide rib rz protrudes from the first recovery passageway member 31c1 when stacked up to the third guide rib rz. The three guide ribs rz are stacked on the opposite side. Then, when the game balls are stacked up to the second guide rib ry, the second guide rib rz protrudes from the second collection passage member 31c2, and thus is stacked on the side opposite to the second guide rib ry. Thereafter, the game ball that has passed through the second count switch 85 in a state where the game ball stays upstream of the recovery passageway 31c is stacked on the game ball stacked on the side opposite to the second guide rib ry. Become. However, since the first guide rib rx is difficult to be stacked on the first recovery passage member 31c1 side, it is guided to the opposite second recovery passage member 31c2 side, and finally provided on the second recovery passage member 31c2. From the opened opening, it passes through the discharge member 31e and is discharged to the back side of the game board unit 8.

  As described above, even if a plurality of game balls are stored in the collection passage 31c or a ball is clogged and the game balls stay up to the upstream of the collection passage 31c, the first to third guide ribs By providing rx, ry, rz in the collection passage 31c, the function of the second variable winning device 31 can be ensured. For example, it is possible to pay out a large amount of prize balls to a player in a big hit game without impeding the entry of game balls into the second variable prize winning device 31 that is operating, and due to the occurrence of a clogged ball. Without giving the player a sense of anxiety, it is possible to enjoy a big hit game with peace of mind and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Next, a storage device 31t that stores game balls discharged from the collection passage 31c will be described. FIG. 17 is a perspective view showing the periphery of the storage device 31t.
As shown in FIG. 17, the storage device 31t is provided on the back side of the collection passage 26o for discharging the game ball that has entered the middle start winning opening 26 to the back side of the game board unit 8, and the entrance of the storage device 31t is collected. It is provided at the outlet of the passage 31c. In addition, since the entrance of the collection passage 26o and the discharge port of the collection passage 31c are provided on the same vertical axis, whether the game ball released from the collection passage 31c has entered the middle start winning opening 26 or not. It can be reminiscent of the player like this.

18 to 20 are exploded perspective views illustrating the storage device 31t.
The storage device 31t includes a base member 31t2 as a base, a cover member 31t1 that forms a game ball passage 31g between the base member 31t2, an effect switch 85e that detects a game ball passing through the passage 31g, and a passage 31g. An opening / closing member 31j that dams a game ball passing through the production switch 85e, a storage device solenoid 31s that is a movable source for moving the opening / closing member 31j, and a link member that transmits the movement of the storage device solenoid 31s to the opening / closing member 31j. 31l. When the storage device solenoid 31s operates back and forth, the link member 31l rotates around the pin 31lp located in the center of the link member 31l, and the opening / closing member 31j is moved back and forth in conjunction with each other. .

  As shown in FIG. 20, the upper surface of the opening / closing member 31j has a structure in which the end on the passage 31g side is inclined. For example, even if the game ball passes through the passage 31g when the opening / closing member 31j is moving, it is possible to make it difficult to sandwich the game ball between the wall surface of the passage 31g and the end of the opening / closing member 31j. Storage in the collection passage 31c can be executed reliably.

  An effect switch 85e for detecting a game ball passing through the passage 31g is provided in the vicinity of the back of the middle start winning opening 26. When the effect switch 85e detects the passage of the game ball, the effect switch 85e is located below the middle start winning opening 26. The LED lamp 40l provided in can be turned on. Further, the number of game balls staying in the collection passage 31c can be calculated by using the second count switch 85 provided at the entrance of the second variable winning device 31 and the effect switch 85e. By using the number of game balls, the range of effects can be expanded. For example, when it is desired to store a predetermined number of game balls in the collection passage 31c, the storage device solenoid 31s is not operated when the storage device solenoid 31s is operated until it reaches that number, or when it is desired to flow without storing the game balls. Can be activated. In addition, by adopting a structure in which the opening / closing members 31j can be sequentially fed one by one, the number of game balls in the collection passage 31c can be strictly managed, and the range of effects can be further widened.

FIGS. 21-23 is a figure explaining the operation example of the storage apparatus 31t.
As shown in FIG. 21, when the storage device solenoid 31s of the storage device 31t is in an inoperative state, the iron core that protrudes from the storage device solenoid 31s is fixed in a state of being pushed back by a spring (not shown). Has been. And when the iron core pushes in the link member 31l, the opening / closing member 31j is pulled toward the storage device solenoid 31s, and as a result, the passage 31g is opened.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 22, when the storage device solenoid 31s of the storage device 31t is in an operating state (when excited and driven), the iron core is fixed in a state of being pulled into the storage device solenoid 31s. Then, the iron core pulls the link member 31l, thereby pushing the opening / closing member 31j toward the passage 31 and consequently closing the passage 31g.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 23, when the storage device solenoid 31s of the storage device 31t is operated, the opening / closing member 31j is pushed out toward the passage 31, and the game ball flowing down the passage 31g in the storage device 31t is blocked. Can do. As a result, the game ball cannot be released from the collection passage 31c, and the game ball is stored in the collection passage 31c.

  As described above, when the game ball passes for a long time in the recovery passageway 31c having a longer stay time than the recovery passageways 28c, 30c of the other variable start winning device 28 and the first variable winning device 30, the storage is performed. It is possible to execute a novel effect such as operating the device 31t and storing the game ball in the collection passage 31c. In addition, by storing a large number of game balls in the long collection passage 31c, it is possible to perform an effect that expects more balls to be obtained from now on, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game. For example, during a big hit game, a large number of game balls are stored in the collection passage 31c, and the reserved continuous chain is informed, thereby giving the player the impression of being added to a single hit ball. It is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation for the next time.

  Next, control processing executed by the main control CPU 72 of the main control device 70 will be described.

[Reset start (main) processing]
When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control CPU 72 starts a reset start process. The reset start process restores the gaming state based on the backup information saved at the previous power shutdown (so-called power recovery) or conversely clears the backup information, thereby adjusting the initial state of the pachinko machine 1 Process. The reset start process is positioned as a main process (main control program) for guaranteeing a stable gaming operation of the pachinko machine 1 after adjusting the initial state.

  24 and 25 are flowcharts illustrating a procedure example of the reset start process. Hereinafter, the process performed by the main control CPU 72 will be described step by step.

  Step S101: First, the main control CPU 72 sets the top address of the stack area in the stack pointer.

  Step S102: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 sets the vector-type interrupt mode (mode 2) and corrects the default RST-type interrupt mode (mode 0). Thus, thereafter, the main control CPU 72 can refer to an arbitrary address (however, the least significant bit is 0) as an interrupt vector and execute a designated interrupt handler.

  Step S103: The main control CPU 72 executes a standby process at reset. This process is for securing a certain standby time (for example, about several thousand ms) at the time of reset start (for example, power-on) and checking the main power-off detection signal during that time. Specifically, when the main control CPU 72 sets the loop counter for the waiting time, the main control CPU 72 bit-checks the input port of the main power-off detection signal while decrementing the value of the loop counter. The main power-off detection signal is input from, for example, a power monitoring IC that is a peripheral device. If the input of the main power-off detection signal is confirmed before the loop counter reaches 0, the main control CPU 72 restarts the process from the beginning. As a result, for example, the system can be protected when a main power switch (not shown) is turned on and off repeatedly within a short time (about 1 to 2 seconds).

  Step S104: Next, the main control CPU 72 permits access to the work area of the RAM 76. Specifically, the RAM protect setting value in the work area is reset (00H). As a result, thereafter, access to the work area of the RAM 76 is permitted.

  Step S105: Also, the main control CPU 72 performs initial setting of a mask register in order to set an interrupt mask. Specifically, a value for enabling the CTC interrupt is stored in the mask register.

  Step S106: The main control CPU 72 refers to the input signal from the previously cleared RAM clear switch and confirms whether or not the RAM clear switch has been operated (switch ON). If the RAM clear switch is not operated (No), step S107 is executed next.

  Step S107: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not backup information is stored in the RAM 76, that is, whether or not a backup validity determination flag is set. If the backup is normally completed in the previous power-off process and the backup validity determination flag (for example, “A55AH”) is set (Yes), then the main control CPU 72 executes step S108.

  Step S108: The main control CPU 72 executes a sum check on the backup information in the RAM 76. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sum-checks all areas of the work area of the RAM 76 (a user work area including a use-prohibited area and a stack area) except the backup validity determination flag and the sum check buffer. If the result of the sum check is normal (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S109.

Step S109: The main control CPU 72 resets the backup validity determination flag (for example, “0000H”).
Step S110: Also, the main control CPU 72 clears the command waiting for transmission immediately before the previous power-off occurrence.

  Step S111: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes an effect control return process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 instructs the effect control device 124 to return a command (for example, a model designation command, a special symbol probability state designation command, a special figure destination determination effect command, an effect command when the working memory number is increased, and the action memory number. (Decrease effect command, count counter remaining command, special game state designation command, etc.). In response to this, the effect control device 124 performs the effect state (for example, the internal probability state, the effect symbol display mode, the operation memory count effect display mode, the sound output content, and the various lamps being executed at the time of the previous power shutdown. Light emission state, etc.) can be restored.

  Step S112: The main control CPU 72 executes state return processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets various values in the work area of the RAM 76 based on the backup information, and the gaming state (for example, the display state of special symbols, the internal probability state, The operation memory contents, various flag states, random number update states, etc.) are restored. Further, the main control CPU 72 restores the backed up PC register value.

  On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch is operated at power-on (step S106: Yes), when the backup validity determination flag is not set (step S107: No), or when the backup information is not normal. (Step S108: No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to Step S113.

Step S113: The main control CPU 72 clears the stored contents other than the use prohibited area of the RAM 76. As a result, the work area and stack area of the RAM 76 are all initialized, and even if valid backup information is stored, the contents are erased.
Step S114: Also, the main control CPU 72 performs initial setting of the RAM 76.

  Step S115: The main control CPU 72 executes an effect control output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs a command (command necessary for effect control) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124 after the initial setting.

  Step S116: The main control CPU 72 executes a payout control output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs an instruction command for starting the payout of prize balls to the payout control device 92.

  Step S117: The main control CPU 72 executes CTC initial setting processing, and performs initial setting of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) that is a peripheral device. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets an interrupt vector register and sets an interrupt count value (for example, 4 ms) in the CTC. As a result, when a CTC interrupt occurs next time, the main control CPU 72 can continue the processing from the program address of the PC register that has been backed up.

  When the above procedure is executed in the reset start process, the main control CPU 72 shifts to the main loop shown in FIG. 25 (connection symbol A → A).

  Step S118, Step S119: The main control CPU 72 executes the power interruption occurrence check process after prohibiting interruption. In this process, the main control CPU 72 performs bit check on the input port of the main power-off detection signal and monitors the occurrence of power-off (decrease in drive voltage). When the power cut-off occurs, the main control CPU 72 clears the output port buffer corresponding to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88, the first big prize opening solenoid 90, the second big prize opening solenoid 97, etc., and then backs up the work area of the RAM 76. The entire contents except the validity judgment flag and the sum check buffer are backed up, and the sum result value is stored in the sum check buffer. Then, the main control CPU 72 stores the above effective value (for example, “A55AH”) in the backup validity determination flag area, prohibits access to the RAM 76, and stops (NOP) the process. On the other hand, if the power shutoff does not occur, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S120. There is also a known programming example in which the CPU executes the process at the time of the occurrence of power interruption as a non-maskable interrupt (NMI) process.

  Step S120: The main control CPU 72 executes an initial value update random number update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 increments random numbers for updating (changing) initial values of various software random numbers. In this embodiment, jackpot determined random numbers (hardware random numbers) and various random numbers excluding hit determined random numbers (hardware random numbers) corresponding to ordinary symbols (for example, jackpot symbol random numbers, reach determination random numbers, variation pattern determination random numbers, etc.) Is generated in the program. These software random numbers are updated by a loop counter within a predetermined range in another interrupt process (step S201 in FIG. 27). In this process, the initial value of the loop counter (all The random number of may not be the target). The initial value updating random number is used to randomly change the initial value, and in step S120, the initial value updating random number is updated. Note that the reason why step S120 is executed after interrupts are prohibited in step S118 is the same as another interrupt management process (step S202 in FIG. 27). ) To prevent the above). As described above, in the present embodiment, the big hit determined random number and the hit determined random number are hardware random numbers generated by the random number generator 75, and the update cycle is faster than the timer interrupt cycle (for example, several ms). Since it is (for example, several μs), it is not necessary to update the big hit determined random number and the initial value of the hit determined random number.

  Step S121, Step S122: The main control CPU 72 permits the interrupt and executes other random number update processing. The random numbers updated by this processing are random numbers (reach determination random numbers, variation pattern determination random numbers, etc.) that are not related to the determination of the winning type (winning type) among software random numbers. This process is performed in the remaining time when a timer interrupt occurs during execution of the main loop and the main control CPU 72 executes another interrupt management process (FIG. 27). The contents of the interrupt management process will be described later.

[Power failure check processing]
FIG. 26 is a flowchart specifically illustrating a procedure example of the power-off occurrence check process.
Step S130: First, the main control CPU 72 sets a condition for checking the occurrence of power interruption. This check condition can be set as an on-counter value for confirming that the main power-off detection signal is continuously output, for example.

  Step S132: Next, the main control CPU 72 reads the main power-off detection switch input port and confirms whether or not the main power-off detection signal is output (checks a specific bit). Although not particularly illustrated, the main power-off detection switch is mounted on the main controller 70, for example, and this main power-off detection switch monitors the drive voltage supplied from the power control unit 162, and the voltage level is monitored. When the voltage falls below the reference voltage, the main power-off detection signal is output. Note that the main power-off detection switch may be built in the power control unit 162. When the main control CPU 72 confirms that the main power-off detection signal is not output at this time (No), the main control CPU 72 exits this process and returns to the reset start process. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the main power-off detection signal is output (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S134.

  Step S134: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the above check conditions are satisfied. Specifically, for example, 1 is subtracted from the on-counter value set in the previous step S130, and it is confirmed whether or not the result is 0. If the on-counter value is not yet 0 at this time (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to step S132 and reconfirms the main power-off detection switch input port. When the check condition is satisfied by repeating the loop from step S134 to step S132 (step S134: Yes), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S136.

  Step S136: The main control CPU 72 uses the test signal terminal and the command control signal in addition to the output ports corresponding to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88, the first big prize opening solenoid 90, and the second big prize opening solenoid 97 as described above. Clear the corresponding output port buffer.

Step S138, Step S140: Next, the main control CPU 72 adds the entire contents excluding the backup validity determination flag and the sum check buffer in the work area of the RAM 76 in units of 1 byte, and repeats until the addition is completed for all areas. .
Step S142: When the calculation of the sum is completed for all the areas (Step S140: Yes), the main control CPU 72 stores the sum result value in the sum check buffer.

Step S144: Next, the main control CPU 72 stores the valid value in the backup validity determination flag area as described above.
Step S146: Further, the main control CPU 72 stores “01H” indicating access prohibition in the protect value of the RAM 76, and prohibits access to the work area (including the use prohibition area and the stack area) of the RAM 76.
Step S148: Then, the main control CPU 72 enters a standby loop, and stops all other processes in preparation for shutting off the main power supply. After the main power is cut off, the backup power is supplied from a backup power circuit (not shown) (for example, a circuit including a capacitive element mounted on the main controller 70), so the stored contents of the RAM 76 are lost even after the main power is turned off. Held without. The backup power supply circuit may be incorporated in the power supply control unit 162, for example.

  Through the above processing, all the information stored in the work area of the RAM 76 to be backed up (sum added) is retained in the RAM 76 even after the main power is turned off. The stored memory is restored as backup information when the power is turned off after confirming the normality of the checksum in the previous reset start process (FIG. 24).

[Interrupt management processing (timer interrupt processing)]
Next, interrupt management processing (timer interrupt processing) will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart illustrating an exemplary procedure of interrupt management processing. The main control CPU 72 executes an interrupt management process every predetermined time (for example, several ms) based on the interrupt request signal from the counter / timer circuit. Each procedure will be described below.

  Step S200: First, the main control CPU 72 saves the values of the registers (accumulator A, flag register F, and general-purpose registers B to L) used during execution of the main loop in the save area of the RAM 76. Another value can be written in the registers (A to L) after the value is saved in the interrupt management process.

  Step S201: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a lottery random number update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 updates the value of the counter for generating various random numbers for lottery. The value of each counter is incremented in the counter area of the RAM 76 and loops within a specified range. Various random numbers include, for example, jackpot symbol random numbers.

  Step S202: The main control CPU 72 executes the initial value update random number update process also here. The content of the process is the same as described above.

  Step S203: The main control CPU 72 executes input processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 inputs various switch signals from an input / output (I / O) port 79. Specifically, a passing detection signal from the gate switch 78, a winning detection signal from the middle start winning port switch 80, the right starting winning port switch 82, the first count switch 84, the second count switch 85, and the winning port switch 86. Read the input state (ON / OFF).

  Step S204: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes switch input event processing. In this process, among the switch signals input in the previous input process, the determination of an event occurring during the game is made based on the winning detection signals from the gate switch 78, the middle start winning opening switch 80, and the right starting winning opening switch 82. Depending on the event that occurred, further processing is executed. The specific contents of the switch input event process will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  In this embodiment, when a winning detection signal (ON) is input from the middle start winning opening switch 80 or the right starting winning opening switch 82, the main control CPU 72 performs internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, respectively. It is determined that an event that triggers the event (lottery opportunity) has occurred. Further, when a passage detection signal (ON) is input from the gate switch 78, the main control CPU 72 determines that an event serving as a lottery trigger corresponding to the normal symbol has occurred. If it is determined that any event has occurred, the main control CPU 72 executes a process corresponding to each event. Note that processing executed when a winning detection signal is input from the middle start winning opening switch 80 or the right starting winning opening switch 82 will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  Step S205, Step S206: The main control CPU 72 executes a special symbol game process and a normal symbol game process during the interrupt management process. These processes are for specifically proceeding with the game in the pachinko machine 1. Of these, in the special symbol game process (step S205), the main control CPU 72 controls the execution of the internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol described above, or the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 34. 2 Controls the display of fluctuation and stop by the special symbol display device 35, and controls the operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 according to the display result. Details of the special symbol game process will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  In the normal symbol game process (step S206), the main control CPU 72 controls the variable display and stop display by the normal symbol display device 33 described above, and operates the variable start winning device 28 according to the display result. Or control. For example, the main control CPU 72 stores a random number (ordinary random number per symbol) acquired in response to the passage of the start gate 20 in the previous switch input event processing (step S204). The random number value is read out from the memory, and it is determined whether or not it falls within a predetermined hit range (operation lottery execution means). When the random number value falls within the hit range, the normal symbol display device 33 displays the normal symbol in a variable manner, and after stopping the normal symbol in a predetermined hit state, the main control CPU 72 switches the normal electric accessory solenoid 88 on. Excitingly activates the variable start winning device 28 (movable piece actuating means). On the other hand, if the random number value is out of the hit range, the main control CPU 72 performs a normal symbol stop display in a manner of deviation after the variable display.

  Step S207: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes prize ball payout processing. In this process, based on the winning detection signals input from the various switches 80, 82, 84, 85, 86 in the previous input process (step S203), a prize ball instruction for instructing the payout control device 92 the number of prize balls. Output the command.

  Step S208: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes external information processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sends the above-mentioned external information signals (for example, prize ball information, door opening information, symbol determination number information, jackpot information, start port information, etc.) to the hall computer of the game hall through the external terminal board 160. Store in port output request buffer.

  In this embodiment, among the various external information signals, for example, “big hit 1” to “big hit 5” are output to the outside as jackpot information, so that an external electronic device (data display) connected to the pachinko machine 1 is displayed. Various jackpot information can be provided (external information signal output means). In other words, the jackpot information is divided into a plurality of “big hit 1” to “big hit 5” and output, so that the type of jackpot (winning type) from these combinations can be tabulated and managed by a hall computer (not shown) or internal Recognize changes in the probability state (low probability state or high probability state) or shortened state of symbol variation time, or generate a small hit (a hit where the condition device does not work) that is not classified as a “big hit” even if it is not winning Can be aggregated and managed. Based on the jackpot information, for example, a data display device (not shown) counts and displays the number of jackpot occurrences within the past several business days for each pachinko machine 1, and recognizes whether or not each jackpot is currently hit Or can recognize whether or not each symbol is currently in a shortened state of the symbol variation time. In this external information processing, the main control CPU 72 controls each output state (set of ON or OFF) of “big hit 1” to “big hit 5” in detail.

  Step S209: Further, the main control CPU 72 executes test signal processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates various test signals representing its internal state (for example, normal symbol game management state, special symbol game management state, jackpot, probability variation function in operation, time reduction function in operation). These are stored in the port output request buffer. With this test signal, for example, the internal state of the main control CPU 72 can be tested outside the main controller 70.

  Step S210: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes display output management processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 performs the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, the first special symbol display device 34, the second special symbol display device 35, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, and the second special symbol. The lighting state of the operation memory lamp 35a, the game state display device 38, etc. is controlled. Specifically, the drive signal stored in the port output request buffer is output to the port in the previous special symbol game process (step S205) or the normal symbol game process (step S206). The drive signal is stored in the port output request buffer as byte data to be applied to each LED. As a result, each LED is driven in a predetermined display mode (a mode of performing symbol variation display, stop display, working memory number display, game state display, etc.).

  Step S211: The main control CPU 72 executes output management processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs the external information signal (byte data) stored in the port output request buffer in the previous external information processing (step S208). In addition, the main control CPU 72 combines the drive signals, test signals, etc. of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88, the first big prize winning solenoid 90, and the second big prize winning solenoid 97 stored in the port output request buffer. Output.

  Step S212: The main control CPU 72 executes an effect control output process. In this processing, it is confirmed whether or not there is a command (command necessary for presentation control) that the main control CPU 72 should transmit to the presentation control device 124 in the command buffer. Output port.

  Step S213: The main control CPU 72 clears the port output request buffer stored by the current CTC interrupt.

  In the present embodiment, an example is given in which the processing (game control program module) in steps S205 to S212 is executed as a timer interrupt processing. However, these processing are incorporated in the main loop of the CPU and executed. There are also known programming examples.

  Step S214: When the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 stores a value (01H) for designating the end of interrupt in the interrupt program counter, and ends the CTC interrupt.

  Step S215, Step S216: Then, the main control CPU 72 restores the saved values of the registers (A to L) and permits the next CTC interrupt. Thereafter, the main control CPU 72 returns to the main loop (program address indicated by the stack pointer).

[Switch input event processing]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the switch input event process (step S204 in FIG. 27). Each procedure will be described below.

  Step S10: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal is input (a lottery opportunity is generated) from the middle start winning opening switch 80 corresponding to the first special symbol. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S12 and executes the first special symbol memory update process. Specific processing contents will be further described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, when no winning detection signal is input (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S14.

  Step S14: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal is input (a lottery opportunity is generated) from the right start winning port switch 82 corresponding to the second special symbol. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S16 and executes the second special symbol memory update process. Here again, the details of the specific processing will be further described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, if there is no input of a winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S18.

  Step S18: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal is input from the first count switch 84 corresponding to the first big winning opening of the first variable winning device 30. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S20 and executes the first big winning mouth count process. In the first grand prize winning count process, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of winning balls to the first variable prize winning device 30 for each round during the big hit game. On the other hand, if no winning detection signal is input (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S21a.

  Step S21a: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal is input from the second count switch 85 corresponding to the second big winning opening of the second variable winning device 31. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S21b and executes the second big winning mouth count process. In the second grand prize winning count process, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of winning balls to the second variable prize winning device 31 during the big hit game. On the other hand, if no winning detection signal is input (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S22.

  Step S22: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not a passage detection signal is input from the gate switch 78 corresponding to the normal symbol. When the input of the passage detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S24 and executes the normal symbol memory update process. In the normal symbol memory update process, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current number of normal symbol working memories is less than the upper limit number (for example, 4), and if it does not reach the upper limit number, obtains a random number per normal symbol To do. Further, the main control CPU 72 increments the normal symbol operation memory number by one. Then, the main control CPU 72 stores the acquired random value per normal symbol in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. On the other hand, when there is no input of the passage detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S26.

  Step S26: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not a passage detection signal is input from the effect switch 85e provided in the storage device 31t. When the input of the passage detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S28 and executes a storage passage passage confirmation process. In the storage passage confirmation passing process, an effect command for transmitting information that the game ball has passed through the passage of the storage device 31t to the effect control device 124 is generated. The generated effect command is output to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 27). On the other hand, when there is no input of the passage detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the interrupt management process (FIG. 27).

[First special symbol memory update process]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the first special symbol memory update process (step S12 in FIG. 28). Hereinafter, the procedure of the first special symbol memory update process will be described in order.

  Step S30: First, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the first special symbol working memory number counter to check whether or not the working memory number is less than the maximum value (for example, 4). The working memory number counter represents the number (the number of sets) of big hit determination random numbers and big hit symbol random numbers stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. That is, the random number storage area of the RAM 76 is divided into four sections (for example, 2 bytes each) for each symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol), and each section contains a big hit decision random number and a big hit symbol random number. Each can be stored as a set. At this time, if the value of the working memory number counter corresponding to the first special symbol has reached the maximum value (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 28). On the other hand, if the value of the working memory number counter is less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S31.

  Step S31: The main control CPU 72 adds one first special symbol working memory number. The first special symbol operation memory number counter is stored, for example, in the operation memory number area of the RAM 76, and the main control CPU 72 increments (+1) the value. Based on the counter value added here, the lighting state of the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a is controlled by the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 27).

  Step S32: The main control CPU 72 acquires a jackpot determination random number value corresponding to the first special symbol from the random number generator 75 through the sampling circuit 77 (acquisition of first lottery element, lottery element acquisition means). The random value is acquired by specifying the pin address of the random number generator 75. In the case where the main control CPU 72 performs 8-bit processing, the address designation is performed twice for each upper byte and lower byte. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot determination random number value from the designated address, the main control CPU 72 saves it at the transfer destination address as a jackpot determination random number corresponding to the first special symbol.

  Step S33: Next, the main control CPU 72 acquires a jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the first special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM 76. The acquisition of the random number value is also performed by designating the address of the jackpot symbol random number counter area. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot symbol random number value from the designated address, the main control CPU 72 saves it at the transfer destination address as a jackpot symbol random number corresponding to the first special symbol.

  Step S34: Also, the main control CPU 72 sequentially acquires a reach determination random number and a variation pattern determination random number from the variation random number counter area of the RAM 76 as a random value related to the variation condition of the first special symbol (variation pattern determination element acquisition). means). Similarly, these random number values are acquired by designating the address of the random number counter area for variation. Then, when the main control CPU 72 acquires the reach determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number from the designated address, it saves them in the transfer destination address.

  Step S35: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved jackpot determination random number, jackpot symbol random number, reach determination random number and variation pattern determination random number to the random number storage area corresponding to the first special symbol, and these random numbers are stored in the empty section in the area. To memorize as a set. The order (for example, first to fourth) is set in the plurality of sections. If all the first to fourth sections are empty at this stage, the random numbers are stored in order from the first section. Alternatively, if the first section is already filled and the other second to fourth sections are empty, the random numbers are stored in order from the second section. Note that the random number storage area is read out in a FIFO (First In First Out) format.

  Step S36: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current special game management status (game state) is a big hit. If it is not during the big hit (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the following steps S37 and S38. If it is a big hit (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S37 and S38 and proceeds to step S38a. The reason why this determination is made in the present embodiment is that the effect of pre-reading is not performed for the incoming ball generated during the big hit.

  Step S37: When the jackpot is not a big hit (Step S36: No), the main control CPU 72 executes an effect determination process at the time of acquisition for the first special symbol. This process determines the result of the internal lottery in advance (before the start of fluctuation) based on the jackpot determination random number and the jackpot symbol random number of the first special symbol respectively acquired in the previous steps S32 to S34, and thereby the production contents This is for determination (so-called “look ahead”). The specific processing contents will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  Step S38: After returning from the at-acquisition effect determination process, the main control CPU 72 next sets the upper bytes (for example, “B8H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command for the first special symbol. This high-order byte data describes that the command type is “for special figure destination determination effect relating to the first special symbol”. Since the lower byte of the special figure destination determination effect command is set in the previous acquisition effect determination process (step S37), the upper byte is combined with the lower byte, for example. Will be generated.

  Step S38a: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets an effect command at the time of increasing the number of working memories regarding the first special symbol. Specifically, for the preceding value (for example, “BBH”) of the upper byte representing the type of command, a 1-word length in which the increased number of working memories (for example, “01H” to “04H”) is added to the lower byte. A production command is generated. At this time, for the lower byte, the second place is set to “0” by default to indicate that the value is “result (change information) due to increase in number of working memories”. That is, if the lower byte is “01H”, it indicates that the current working memory number has become “01H” as a result of increasing by one from the previous working memory number “00H”. Similarly, if the lower byte is “02H” to “04H”, it is increased by one from the previous working memory numbers “01H” to “03H”, so that the current working memory number is “02H” to “02H”. 04H ". The preceding value “BBH” is a value indicating that the current effect command is the working memory number command for the first special symbol.

  Step S39: The main control CPU 72 executes an effect command output setting process for the first special symbol. This process is for transmitting the special figure destination determination effect command generated in the previous step S38, the effect command for increasing the number of working memories generated in step S38a, and the start opening winning tone control command to the effect control device 124. (Memory number notification means).

  When the above procedure is completed or the first special symbol operation memory number has reached 4 (step S30: No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event process (FIG. 28).

[Second special symbol memory update process]
Next, FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the second special symbol memory update process (step S16 in FIG. 28). Hereinafter, the procedure of the second special symbol memory update process will be described in order.

  Step S40: The main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the second special symbol working memory number counter to check whether or not the working memory number is less than the maximum value. Similarly to the above, the second special symbol actuated memory number counter represents the number (number of sets) of jackpot determination random numbers and jackpot symbol random numbers stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. At this time, if the value of the second special symbol operation memory number counter reaches the maximum value (for example, 4) (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event process (FIG. 28). On the other hand, if the value of the second special symbol operation memory number counter is still less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S41 and thereafter.

  Step S41: The main control CPU 72 increments the second special symbol working memory number by one (increments the value of the second special symbol working memory number counter). Similarly to the previous step S31 (FIG. 29), the lighting state of the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is controlled by the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 27) based on the counter value added here. Will be.

  Step S42: The main control CPU 72 acquires a jackpot determination random number value corresponding to the second special symbol from the random number generator 75 through the sampling circuit 77 (acquisition of second lottery element, lottery element acquisition means). The method for acquiring the random value is the same as that in step S32 (FIG. 29) described above.

  Step S43: Next, the main control CPU 72 acquires a jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the second special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM 76. The method for acquiring the random value is the same as that in step S33 (FIG. 29) described above.

  Step S44: Also, the main control CPU 72 sequentially acquires a reach determination random number and a variation pattern determination random number regarding the variation condition of the second special symbol from the variation random number counter area of the RAM 76 (variation pattern determination element acquisition means). The acquisition of these random values is also performed in the same manner as step S34 (FIG. 29) described above.

  Step S45: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved jackpot determination random number, jackpot symbol random number, reach determination random number, and variation pattern determination random number to the random number storage area corresponding to the second special symbol, and these random numbers in the empty section in the area To memorize as a set. The storage method is the same as step S35 (FIG. 29) described above.

  Step S45a: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current game management status (game state) is a big hit. If it is not a big hit (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the following steps S46 and S47. Conversely, if it is a big hit (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S46 and S47 and proceeds to step S48. The reason why this determination is made in the present embodiment is that the effect of pre-reading is not performed for the same incoming ball that occurred during the big hit.

  Step S46: When it is other than big hit (step S45a: No), next, the main control CPU 72 executes an effect determination process at the time of acquisition for the second special symbol. This process determines the result of the internal lottery in advance (before the start of the change) based on the big hit determination random number and the big hit symbol random number of the second special symbol obtained in the previous steps S42 to S44, respectively, It is for judging. The specific processing contents will be described later.

  Step S47: After returning from the effect determination process at the time of acquisition, the main control CPU 72 sets the upper byte (for example, “B9H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command. This high-order byte data describes that the command type is “for special figure destination determination effect relating to the second special symbol”. Similarly, since the lower byte of the special figure destination determination effect command is set in the previous effect determination processing at the time of acquisition (step S46), for example, one word is synthesized by combining the upper byte with the lower byte. A long command will be generated.

  Step S48: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets an effect command for increasing the number of working memories with respect to the second special symbol. Here, a one-word-length production command in which the increased number of working memories (for example, “01H” to “04H”) is added to the lower byte with respect to the preceding value (for example, “BCH”) representing the command type. Is generated. Similarly, for the second special symbol, the second place of the lower byte is set to “0” by default to indicate that the value is “a result of an increase in the number of working memories (change information)”. it can. The preceding value “BCH” is a value indicating that the current effect command is a working memory number command for the second special symbol.

  Step S49: The main control CPU 72 executes an effect command output setting process for the second special symbol. As a result, preparation for transmitting a special figure destination determination effect command, an effect command when increasing the number of operating memories, a start opening winning sound control command, and the like regarding the second special symbol to the effect control device 124 is performed (memory number notifying means). . When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event process (FIG. 28).

[Acquisition process during acquisition]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of an effect determination process at the time of acquisition. The main control CPU 72 performs this acquisition effect determination process in the first special symbol memory update process and the second special symbol memory update process (step S37 in FIG. 29, step S46 in FIG. 30) (predetermined determination). Execution means). As described above, this processing is executed for each of the first special symbol (when entering the middle start winning opening 26) and the second special symbol (when entering the variable start winning device 28). Therefore, the following description may correspond to a process related to the first special symbol and a process related to the second special symbol. Hereinafter, the contents of the processing will be described along each procedure.

  Step S50: The main control CPU 72 sets the lower byte (for example, “00H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command (point determination information). The byte data set here represents the standard value of the command (at the time of loss).

  Step S52: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the jackpot determination random number as the first determination random value. The random numbers to be loaded here are those stored in the RAM 76 in the first special symbol memory update process (step S35 in FIG. 29) or the second special symbol memory update process (step S45 in FIG. 30). .

  Step S54: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the loaded random number is outside the range of the winning value (here, the lower limit value or less) (lottery result destination determining means). Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets a comparison value (lower limit value) in the A register, and subtracts the loaded random number value from this comparison value. The comparison value (lower limit value) is defined in advance according to the winning probability of the internal lottery in the pachinko machine 1. Next, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the calculation result is 0 or a positive value from the value of the flag register, for example. As a result, if the loaded random number is outside the range of the winning value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S80.

  Step S80: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a variation pattern information preliminary determination process at the time of deviation (variation pattern destination determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates the variation pattern destination determination command described above for the variation time at the time of disconnection. In the variation pattern destination determination command generated here, prior determination information regarding the variation time (or variation pattern number) particularly when the “time reduction function” is activated is reflected. For example, if the current state is when the “time reduction function” is activated, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the “out-of-reach fluctuation fluctuation (non-shortening fluctuation time)” based on the loaded reach determination random number. Judge whether there is. As a result, when the fluctuation time corresponds to “outlier reach fluctuation (non-shortening fluctuation time)”, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to “short-time / non-shortening fluctuation time”. In the case of reach variation, it is also possible to determine a “reach group (type of reach)” from the reach mode random number and generate a variation pattern destination determination command from the result. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time does not correspond to the “outlier reach fluctuation (non-shortening fluctuation time)”, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the “short / mid-shortening fluctuation time”. Alternatively, if the current state is when the “time reduction function” is inactive (low probability state), the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the “normally out of reach reach fluctuation” based on the loaded reach determination random number. It is determined whether or not. As a result, when the fluctuation time corresponds to “normally deviation reach fluctuation”, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to “normally deviation reach fluctuation time”. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time does not correspond to “normally deviation reach fluctuation”, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to “normal deviation fluctuation time”. Further, the variation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process (steps S39 and S49) as described above. In this process, the main control CPU 72 may generate a change pattern destination determination command for the change pattern at the time of the small hit, similarly to the process at the time of the above-described loss.

  When the above procedure is executed, the process returns to the caller's first special symbol memory update process (FIG. 28) or the second special symbol memory update process (FIG. 29). On the other hand, if it is determined in the previous step S54 that the loaded random number is not outside the range of the winning value but within the range (step S54: No), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S56.

  Step S56: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result is set. The probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result is set when there is a winning value among the jackpot determination random numbers stored so far, although the fluctuation has not yet started. Specifically, if there is a winning value in the jackpot decision random number stored so far, if the jackpot symbol random number paired with this corresponds to “probability variation”, for example, the probability state schedule flag “A0H” is set. This value represents a flag value for setting as a schedule that a high probability state is to be set in advance determination (prefetching determination) of the jackpot determined random number acquired after the jackpot determined random number. On the other hand, if there is a winning value in the jackpot decision random number stored so far, and the jackpot symbol random number paired with this corresponds to "non-probable (normal) symbol", the probability state For example, “01H” is set in the schedule flag. This value represents a flag value for setting as a schedule that a normal (low) probability state is set in advance determination (prefetching determination) of the big hit determination random number acquired after this big hit determination random number. If the winning value does not exist in the big hit determination random numbers stored so far, the flag value is reset (00H). Further, the value of the probability state schedule flag is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76, for example. Here, an example is given in which the advance hit determination is strictly performed using the “probability state schedule flag”. However, when the advance hit determination is simply performed based on the current probability state, step S56 and the subsequent steps are performed. Step S58, step S60, step S62, step S76, etc. may be omitted.

  If the probability state schedule flag has not yet been set (step S56: No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S66.

  Step S66: In this case, the main control CPU 72 sets the comparison value for the next low probability (normal time) in the A register. The low probability comparison value is also defined in advance according to the winning probability at the low probability in the pachinko machine 1.

  Step S68: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the “current probability state flag”. This probability state flag indicates whether or not the current internal state has a high probability (probably changing), and is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76. If the current probability state is a high probability (probably changing), the value “01H” is set as the state flag, and if the current probability state is low (normally), the value of the state flag is reset (“00H”). ").

  Step S70: Then, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the loaded current special symbol probability state flag does not represent a high probability (≠ 01H), and if the result indicates a high probability (No Then, step S64 is executed.

  Step S64: The main control CPU 72 sets a comparative value for high probability. As a result, the low-probability comparison value set in the previous step S66 is rewritten. The high probability comparison value is defined in advance according to the winning probability at the high probability in the pachinko machine 1.

  As described above, when the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result is not yet set and the current internal state is high probability, the comparison value is rewritten for high probability and the next step S72 is performed. Will be executed. On the other hand, when it is confirmed in the previous step S70 that the current probability state flag does not represent a high probability (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips step S64 and executes the next step S72.

  Step S72: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the random number loaded in the previous step S52 is out of the winning value range (lottery result destination determination means). That is, the main control CPU 72 subtracts the jackpot determination random number value from the comparison value set for each state. Similarly, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the calculation result is a negative value (<0) from the value of the flag register, and if the result is that the loaded random number is outside the range of the winning value (Yes) ), The main control CPU 72 executes the above-described variation pattern information preliminary determination process (step S80). On the other hand, if the loaded random number is not outside the range of the winning value but is within the range (No), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S74.

  Step S74: The main control CPU 72 executes a jackpot symbol type determination process. This process is for determining the big hit type (winning type) at that time based on the big hit symbol random number paired with the big hit decision random number. For example, the main control CPU 72 loads the jackpot symbol random number for each symbol stored in the first special symbol memory update process (step S35 in FIG. 29) or the second special symbol memory update process (step S45 in FIG. 30). Then, the calculation using the comparison value is executed in the same manner as in step S54 described above, and it is determined from the result whether the jackpot type corresponds to “non-probable variation (normal) symbol” or “probability variation symbol”. The main control CPU 72 stores the determination result at this time as a special symbol destination determination value, and proceeds to the next step S76.

  Step S76: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result. Specifically, when the special symbol destination determination value stored in the previous step S74 represents “non-probable change (normal) symbol”, the main control CPU 72 sets the value “01H” in the probability state schedule flag. On the other hand, when the special symbol destination determination value represents “probability variation symbol”, the main control CPU 72 sets the value “A0H” in the probability state schedule flag. As a result, in the subsequent processing, it is determined that “flag set has been completed” in step S56.

  Step S78: The main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol destination determination value stored in the previous step S74 as the lower byte of the special symbol destination determination effect command. As the special symbol destination determination value, for example, “01H” is set when it corresponds to “non-probable (normal) symbol”, and “A0H” is set when it corresponds to “probable variation”. In any case, by setting the lower byte data here, the standard lower byte data “00H” set in the previous step S50 is rewritten.

  Step S79: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a big hit hour variation pattern information prior determination process (variation pattern destination determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates the above-described variation pattern destination determination command for the variation time at the big hit. In the variation pattern destination determination command generated here, for example, prior determination information related to the reach variation time (or variation pattern number) at the time of big hit is reflected. Further, the variation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process (steps S39 and S49) as described above.

  The above is the procedure before the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result is set (before the internal first hit). On the other hand, when the probability state schedule flag is set through the previous step S76, the following procedure is executed. However, when the previous hit determination is performed only with the current probability state as described above, it is not necessary to execute the following step S56, step S58, step S60, step S62, and step S76.

  Step S56: When the main control CPU 72 confirms that a value has already been set in the probability state schedule flag (Yes), it next executes step S58.

  Step S58: The main control CPU 72 first sets a low probability (normal time) comparison value in the A register.

  Step S60: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads a “probability state schedule flag”. The probability state schedule flag is for setting a probability state in a subsequent determination based on the immediately preceding determination result as described above, and is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76. . If the probability state based on the immediately preceding destination determination result is scheduled to shift to a high probability (probability change), “A0H” is set as the value of the probability state schedule flag as described above. If the probability state based on is scheduled to return to a low probability (normal), “01H” is set as the value of the probability state schedule flag.

  Step S62: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the loaded probability state schedule flag does not represent a high-probability schedule (≠ 01H), and if the result indicates a high-probability schedule ( No) Next, step S64 is executed, and a comparative value for high probability is set.

  As described above, when the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result is already set and the value is a high probability, the next step S72 and subsequent steps after rewriting the comparison value for the high probability. Will be executed. On the other hand, when it is confirmed in the previous step S62 that the probability state schedule flag does not represent a schedule with a high probability but a schedule with a normal (low) probability (Yes), the main control CPU 72 performs a step. S64 is skipped and the subsequent step S72 and subsequent steps are executed. Thus, in the present embodiment, it is possible to make a prior jackpot determination in consideration of subsequent changes in internal state (normal probability state → high probability state, high probability state → normal probability state) based on the previous determination result. .

  When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the first special symbol memory update process (FIG. 29) or the second special symbol memory update process (FIG. 30).

[Special design game processing]
Next, the details of the special symbol game process executed in the interrupt management process (FIG. 27) will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the special symbol game process. The special symbol game process includes an execution selection process (step S1000), a special symbol change pre-process (step S2000), a special symbol change process (step S3000), a special symbol stop display process (step S4000), and a bonus game variable winning device. This is a configuration including a subroutine (program module) group of a management process (step S5000) and a small winning time variable winning device management process (step S6000). First, the basic flow of the special symbol game process will be described along each process.

  Step S1000: In the execution selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects from the “jump table” the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any one of steps S2000 to S6000). For example, the main control CPU 72 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the special symbol game process as the return address in the stack pointer.

  Which process is selected as the next jump destination differs depending on the progress of the process performed so far (special symbol game management status). For example, if the special symbol has not yet started changing display (special symbol game management status: 00H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol variation pre-processing (step S2000) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the special symbol variation pre-processing has already been completed (special symbol game management status: 01H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol variation processing (step S3000) as the next jump destination, and the special symbol variation is in progress. If the process has been completed (special symbol game management status: 02H), the special symbol stop displaying process (step S4000) is selected as the next jump destination. In this embodiment, the jump destination address is specified by the “jump table” and the process is selected. However, apart from such a selection method, a “process flag”, a “process selection flag”, or the like is used. There is also a known programming example in which the CPU selects a process to be executed next. In such a programming example, the CPU CALLs each process in a single way, and at the top step, the conditional branch (continuation / return) is performed with reference to the flag one by one. There is no need for the CPU 72 to call each process one by one.

  Step S2000: In the special symbol variation pre-processing, the main control CPU 72 performs an operation to prepare conditions for starting the variation display of the special symbol. The specific processing content will be described later using another flowchart.

  Step S3000: In the special symbol variation processing, the main control CPU 72 performs drive control of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 while counting the variation timer. Specifically, an ON or OFF drive signal (1 byte data) is output for each segment and dot (0th to 7th) of the 7-segment LED. The pattern of the drive signal changes with the passage of time, whereby a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

  Step S4000: In the special symbol stop display process, the main control CPU 72 controls the drive of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35. Similarly, an ON or OFF drive signal is output for each segment and dot of the 7-segment LED. However, the pattern of the drive signal is constant, whereby a special symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Step S5000: The jackpot variable winning device management process is selected when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a big-hit manner in the previous special symbol stop display process. For example, when a special symbol is stopped and displayed in a 10-round jackpot or 16-round jackpot mode, an opportunity to shift from the normal state until then to a jackpot gaming state (a special gaming state advantageous to the player) occurs. During the big hit game, the jump destination is set in the big win time variable winning device management process in the previous execution selection process (step S1000), and the special symbol variation display is not performed. In the big win variable winning device management process, the first big winning opening solenoid 90 is set for a predetermined time (for example, 29 seconds or until nine game balls are counted) for a predetermined number of continuous operations (for example, 10 times). The first variable winning device 30 is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern (continuous operation of the special electric accessory). In addition, when 16 rounds are won, after the operation of the first variable prize winning device 30, the second big prize opening solenoid 97 is set for a certain period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 0.1 seconds or 9 game balls are received). Until the ball is counted), it is excited for a preset number of continuous operations (for example, 6 times), whereby the second variable winning device 31 is opened / closed in a predetermined pattern (operation of the special electric accessory). During this time, the game balls are intensively awarded to the first variable prize winning device 30 and the second variable prize winning device 31, thereby giving the player an opportunity to collect a lot of prize balls (special game). Execution means). The opening and closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 in the case of a big hit is called “round”, and if the total number of continuous operations is 16 times, these are called “16 rounds”. Sometimes referred to generically. In the present embodiment, the first variable winning device 30 is opened / closed from the first round to the 10th round, and the second variable winning device 31 is opened / closed from the 11th round to the 16th round. In addition, in this embodiment, not only 16 round big hits but also 10 round big hits are provided as the types of big hits. For 16 round big hits and 10 round big hits, there are a plurality of winning types (winning symbols). ) May be provided.

  Further, when the main control CPU 72 sets a big winning opening opening pattern (number of rounds, number of opening / closing operations per round, opening time, etc.) in the big winning variable winning device management process, the first variable winning device 30 for one round is set. Alternatively, every time the opening / closing operation of the second variable winning device 31 is completed, the value of the round number counter is incremented by one. The value of the round number counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76 with an initial value of 0, for example. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a round number command representing the value of the round number counter. The round number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 27). When the value of the round number counter reaches the set number of continuous operations, the main control CPU 72 ends the big hit game (big player) only for that round.

  When the big hit game ends, the main control CPU 72 changes the state after the big hit game (high probability state, time reduction state) based on the game state flag (probability variation function operation flag, time reduction function operation flag) ( High probability time shortening state transition means). In the “high probability state”, the probability variation function is activated, and the winning probability in the internal lottery becomes, for example, about ten times higher than usual (specific game state transition means, high probability state transition means, high probability state setting means). Further, in the “time reduction state”, the time reduction function is activated, and the normal symbol operation lottery has a high probability as described above, and the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened and the opening time of the variable start winning device 28 is reduced. Is extended and the number of times of opening increases (so-called electric Chu support is performed). Note that the “high probability state” and the “time reduction state” may be transferred to only one of them in terms of control, or may be transferred in accordance with both of them.

  Step S6000: The small winning hour variable winning device management process is selected when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the small winning manner in the special symbol stop display process. For example, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a small hit state, an opportunity to shift from the normal state until then to the small hit gaming state occurs. During the small hit game, the jump destination is set in the small hit prize variable winning device management process in the previous execution selection process (step S1000), and the special symbol variation display is not performed. In the small hit game, the first variable winning device 30 opens and closes a predetermined number of times (for example, twice) for a predetermined opening time (for example, 0.1 seconds), but most of the balls enter the first big prize opening. Does not occur.

[Multiple winning types]
In the present embodiment, for the above “10 round big hit”, for example, (1) “10 round normal (non-probable change) big win” and (2) “10 round positive change big win” are provided as a plurality of winning types. . In addition to “10 rounds big hit”, “16 rounds big hit” is provided. For example, (3) “16 rounds probable big hit 1”, (4) “16 rounds probable big hit 2”, (5 ) “16 rounds probable big hit 3” is provided. However, in this embodiment, jackpots other than 10 rounds and 16 rounds may be provided.

  The winning type corresponds to the type of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is stopped and displayed at the time of winning. For example, “10 round normal jackpot” corresponds to the jackpot of “10 round normal symbol”, and “10 round probability variable jackpot” corresponds to the jackpot of “10 round probability jackpot”. Further, “16 round probability variation jackpot 1” corresponds to the jackpot of “16 round probability variation symbol 1”, and “16 round probability variation jackpot 2” corresponds to the jackpot of “16 round probability variation symbol 2”. Further, “16 round probability variation big hit 3” corresponds to big hit of “16 round probability variation big hit 3”. Therefore, hereinafter, the “winning type” will be appropriately referred to as “winning symbol”.

[10 round normal design]
In the above special symbol stop display process, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of “10 round normal symbols”, an opportunity to shift from the normal state until then to the big hit gaming state occurs (special game execution means) . In this case, the first grand opening is opened once for a sufficiently long time from the first round (for example, a maximum opening time of 29.0 seconds), and this continues until the tenth round. For this reason, in the “10 round normal symbol” jackpot game, 10 rounds of winning balls (prize balls) are given to the player. The first grand prize opening is closed without waiting for the longest opening time to elapse when a predetermined number of times (for example, 9 times = 9 game balls) have occurred in one round. In this case, since the “probability changing function” is not activated, the privilege to shift to the “high probability state” is not given to the player. However, even if the “time reduction function” is inactive in the previous game, the privilege to shift to the “time reduction state” can be obtained by operating the “time reduction function” after the big hit game ends. Granted to a person.

[10-round probable design]
In the special symbol stop display processing described above, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of “10 round probability variation symbol”, an opportunity to shift from the normal state until then to the big hit gaming state occurs (special game execution means) . In this case, the first grand opening is opened once for a sufficiently long time from the first round (for example, a maximum opening time of 29.0 seconds), and this continues until the tenth round. The big hit game of “10 rounds probable change symbol” also gives the player 10 balls (prize balls) for 10 rounds. Then, for example, by operating the “probability changing function” after the big hit game is finished, a privilege to shift to the “high probability state” is given to the player as a result. Also, in this case, even if the “time reduction function” is inactive in the previous game, the “time reduction function” is activated after the big hit game is completed, and the time is shifted to “time reduction state”. The privilege to be given is given to the player.

[16 rounds probabilistic pattern 1]
In the above special symbol stop display process, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of “16 round probability variation symbol 1”, an opportunity to shift from the normal state until then to the big hit gaming state occurs (special game executing means) ). In this case, the first grand opening is opened once for a sufficiently long time from the first round (for example, a maximum opening time of 29.0 seconds), and this continues until the tenth round. The remaining 11th to 16th rounds of the second variable prize winning device 31 of the second variable prize winning device 31 are shorter in time (0.1 second opening time) than the 1st to 10th rounds. Mouth open once. Therefore, the 10th to 16th rounds of the jackpot game of “16 round probability variation pattern 1” are terminated without giving a substantial play (prize ball) to the player. For this reason, the big hit game of “16 rounds probable variation 1” gives the player about 10 rounds (prize balls). Then, for example, by operating the “probability changing function” after the big hit game is finished, a privilege to shift to the “high probability state” is given to the player as a result. Also, in this case, even if the “time reduction function” is inactive in the previous game, the “time reduction function” is activated after the big hit game is completed, and the time is shifted to “time reduction state”. The privilege to be given is given to the player.

[16 round probability variation 2]
In the above special symbol stop display process, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of “16 round probability variation 2”, an opportunity to shift from the normal state until then to the big hit gaming state occurs (special game executing means) ). In this case, the first grand opening is opened once for a sufficiently long time from the first round (for example, a maximum opening time of 29.0 seconds), and this continues until the tenth round. Then, the second big prize opening of the second variable prize winning device 31 is opened once each over a sufficiently long time (for example, the opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest) from the 11th round, which is 16 rounds. Continue to eyes. For this reason, the big hit game of “16 round probability variation 2” gives the player 16 balls (prize balls) for the game. In addition, when a predetermined number of times (for example, 9 times = 9 game balls) has been won within one round, the second big prize opening is closed without waiting for the longest opening time to elapse. Then, for example, by operating the “probability changing function” after the big hit game is finished, a privilege to shift to the “high probability state” is given to the player as a result. Also, in this case, even if the “time reduction function” is inactive in the previous game, the “time reduction function” is activated after the big hit game is completed, and the time is shifted to “time reduction state”. The privilege to be given is given to the player.

[16-round probability variation 3]
In the above special symbol stop display process, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of “16 round probability variation 3”, an opportunity to shift from the normal state until then to the big hit gaming state occurs (special game executing means) ). In this case, the first grand opening is opened once for a sufficiently long time from the first round (for example, a maximum opening time of 29.0 seconds), and this continues until the tenth round. Then, the second big prize opening of the second variable prize winning device 31 is opened once each over a sufficiently long time (for example, the opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest) from the 11th round, which is 16 rounds. Continue to eyes. For this reason, the big hit game of “16 round probability variation 2” gives the player 16 balls (prize balls) for the game. Then, for example, by operating the “probability changing function” after the big hit game is finished, a privilege to shift to the “high probability state” is given to the player as a result. Also, in this case, even if the “time reduction function” is inactive in the previous game, the “time reduction function” is activated after the big hit game is completed, and the time is shifted to “time reduction state”. The privilege to be given is given to the player.

  Here, “16-round probability variation 2” and “16-round probability variation symbol 3” are both common in that 16 rounds of play balls (prize balls) are given to the player. In the case of “symbol 2”, the interval time between the 10th and 11th rounds is set to be relatively long (for example, about 30 seconds), whereas it corresponds to “16th round probability variation 3” In this case, the difference is that the interval time between the 10th and 11th rounds is set to be relatively short (for example, about 2 to 2.5 seconds, which is the same as other interval times). The reason for securing a longer interval time between the 10th and 11th rounds in the case of “16 round probability variation 2” is to secure the stage of the round continuation judge production (treasure challenge production). Because.

  In any case, if the winning symbol is one of the above “10-round probability variation symbol”, “16-round probability variation symbol 1”, “16 round probability variation symbol 2” or “16 round probability variation symbol 3”, the big hit game ends. The player is given a privilege to shift the internal state to the “high probability state” later. In the “high probability state”, an internal lottery is won, and the winning symbol at that time is “10 round probability variation symbol”, “16 round probability variation symbol 1”, “16 round probability variation symbol 2” or “16 round probability variation symbol 3”. If any of the above is true, the “high probability state” continues (restarts) after the jackpot game ends. On the other hand, if the internal lottery is won in the “high probability state” and the above “10 round normal symbol” is met, the internal state returns to the normal probability state (low probability state) after the big hit game ends. Needless to say, if the internal lottery is won in the normal probability state and it falls under “10 round normal symbol”, the internal state is maintained in the normal probability state even after the big hit game ends.

[Small hits]
Further, in the present embodiment, small wins are provided as winning types other than non-winning. When winning a small hit, a small hit game is performed separately from the big hit game, and the first variable winning device 30 is opened and closed (special game execution means). That is, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a small hit state in the special symbol stop display process, the small hit game (the first variable winning device 30 is activated in the normal probability state or the high probability state). (In this embodiment, no small hit is set for the second special symbol). In such a small hit game, the first variable winning device 30 opens and closes a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), but hardly enters the first big winning opening. In addition, even if the small hit game ends, the “probability variation function” does not operate, and the “time reduction function” does not operate, so the “probability state” or “time reduction state” The privilege to be transferred is not granted (it is not a prerequisite for that). Also, even if you win a small hit in the “high probability state”, the “high probability state” will not end after the small hit game ends. The “time reduction state” does not end after the winning game ends (except when the upper limit is reached). In the present embodiment, the game specification for setting a small hit is used, but it may be a game specification for not setting a small hit.

[Special symbol change pre-treatment]
FIG. 33 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure for special symbol variation pre-processing. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S2100: First, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the first special symbol working memory number or the second special symbol working memory number remains (greater than 0). This confirmation can be made with reference to the value of the working memory number counter stored in the RAM 76. When the number of working memories of both the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 executes a demonstration setting process in step S2500.

  Step S2500: In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates a demonstration effect command. The demonstration effect command is output to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 27). When the demo setting process is executed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process. At the time of return, it returns to the end address as described above (and so on).

  On the other hand, if the value of the working memory number counter of either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is greater than 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2200.

  Step S2200: The main control CPU 72 executes a special symbol storage area shift process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 preferentially reads out the lottery random numbers (big hit determination random number, big hit symbol random number) stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76, which corresponds to the second special symbol. At this time, if random numbers are stored in two or more sections, the main control CPU 72 reads and erases (consumes) the random numbers in order from the first section, and then moves (shifts) the remaining random numbers one by one to the previous section. ) The read random number is stored, for example, in another temporary storage area. When the random number corresponding to the second special symbol is not stored, the main control CPU 72 reads the random number corresponding to the first special symbol and stores it in the temporary storage area. Each random number stored in the temporary storage area is used for internal lottery in the next jackpot determination process. As a result, in the present embodiment, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially performed over the first special symbol. In addition, the program which reads a random number in the order memorize | stored simply may be sufficient, without providing the priority order according to such special symbols. Further, in this process, the main control CPU 72 subtracts one value of the working memory number counter (the one of the first special symbol or the second special symbol which has been subjected to the random number shift) stored in the RAM 76, and after the subtraction Is set to “Number of working memories at start of change”. Thereby, the display mode of the number stored by the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a or the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a changes (decreases by 1) in the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 27). . When the procedure so far is finished, the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2300.

  Step S2300: The main control CPU 72 executes a big hit determination process (internal lottery). In this process, the main control CPU 72 first sets a range of the big hit value and determines whether or not the read random number value is included in this range (internal lottery execution means). The range of the jackpot value set at this time is different between the normal probability state and the high probability state (when the probability variation function is activated). In the high probability state, the range of the jackpot value is expanded to about 10 times that of the normal probability state. The If the random value read at this time is included in the range of the big hit value, the main control CPU 72 sets the big hit flag (01H), and then proceeds to step S2400.

  When the above big hit flag is not set, the main control CPU 72 sets the range of the small hit value next in the same big hit determination process, and determines whether or not the read random number value is included in this range (lottery execution). means). The “small hit” here is other than non-winning (out of), but is different from “big hit”. That is, “big hit” generates an opportunity (game milestone) to shift to the above “high probability state” or “time reduction state”, but “small hit” does not generate such an opportunity. However, “small hit” is positioned as satisfying the condition for operating the first variable winning device 30 as in “big hit”. The range of the small hit value set at this time may be different between the normal probability state and the high probability state (when the probability variation function is activated), or may be the same. In any case, if the read random number value is included in the range of the small hit value, the main control CPU 72 sets the small hit flag, and then proceeds to step S2400. As described above, in the present embodiment, as the hit range corresponding to other than the non-winning, the range of the big hit value and the small hit value is defined in advance in the program. Each of them may be written in the ROM 74, read out, and the big hit determination may be performed while comparing with the random value.

  Step S2400: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not a value (01H) is set for the big hit flag in the previous big hit determination process. If the value (01H) is not set in the jackpot flag (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2402.

  Step S2402: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not a value (01H) is set in the small hit flag in the previous big hit determination process. If the value (01H) is not set in the small hit flag (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2404. The main control CPU 72 may determine the big hit (for example, 01H is set) or the small hit (for example, 0AH is set) according to the value of the common hit flag without separately preparing the big hit flag and the small hit flag.

  Step S2404: The main control CPU 72 executes an off-time stop symbol determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets stop symbol number data at the time of disconnection by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of losing) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. These commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 27).

  In this embodiment, since the 7-segment LED is used for the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35, for example, the display mode of the stop symbol at the time of disconnection is always set to one segment (the center It is possible to fix the stop symbol number data to one value (for example, 64H) by keeping only the lighting display of the bar "-"). In this case, the storage capacity used in the program can be reduced, the processing load on the main control CPU 72 can be reduced, and the processing speed can be improved.

  Step S2405: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a deviation variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the fluctuation pattern number at the time of deviation for the special symbol (fluctuation pattern selection means). The variation pattern number is used to distinguish the variation display type (pattern) of the special symbol or to correspond to the variation time required for the variation display. Since the fluctuation time at the time of loss differs depending on whether or not it is the above “time reduction state”, in this process, the main control CPU 72 loads the gaming state flag and the current state is “time reduction state”. Check if it exists. In the “time reduction state”, except for the case where reach fluctuation is basically performed, the fluctuation time at the time of disconnection is set to a shortened time (for example, about 2.0 seconds) (shortening fluctuation time determination means) ). In addition, even if not in the “time shortening state”, the fluctuation time at the time of losing is based on, for example, “the number of operating memories at the start of fluctuation display (0 to 3)” set in step S2200, except when the reach fluctuation is performed. (For example, the number of working memories at the start of variable display 0 to about 12.5 seconds, the number of operating memories at the start of variable display 1 to about 8 seconds, the number of operating memories at the start of variable display 2 to 5 → About 3 seconds, the number of working memories at the start of variable display is 3 → 2.5 seconds). Note that the symbol stop display time at the time of disconnection is constant (for example, about 0.5 seconds) regardless of the variation pattern. The main control CPU 72 sets the value of the determined fluctuation time (at the time of disconnection) in the fluctuation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time at the time of disconnection in the stop symbol display timer.

  In the present embodiment, when the result of the internal lottery is a non-winning result, for example, a “reach effect” is generated and the control is performed so that the “reach effect” is not generated. It is said. The “variation pattern selection table at the time of loss” preliminarily defines variation patterns corresponding to a plurality of types of effects such as “non-reach effect” and “reach effect”. One of the fluctuation patterns is selected from the inside. The reach production includes various reach production such as normal reach production, long reach production, super reach production, and the like.

  In the present embodiment, a total of seven types of selection tables “fluctuation pattern selection tables A to F, N” are prepared as “fluctuation pattern selection tables at the time of loss”. Since one table is set, a change pattern in the change is determined based on the set selection table. For example, the “offset fluctuation pattern selection table N” is set in the low probability non-time shortened state, and any of the “offset fluctuation pattern selection tables A to C” is set in the low probability time shortened state. Any one of “offset fluctuation pattern selection tables D to F” is set as the time reduction state. Which of the three types is set in the same gaming state is set based on a predetermined condition in the processing described later, and specific processing contents will be further described later with reference to another flowchart. It should be noted that a selection table of more or less than the following types may be prepared without being limited to these seven types, and in addition, it is common to the case of the low probability time shortening state and the case of the high probability time shortening state. It is good also as a switching fluctuation number table. In addition, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or reset, the “fluctuation pattern selection table N at the time of disconnection” is set, and similarly, a “big hit” is selected as the fluctuation pattern selection table for the big hit or the small hit. It is assumed that “time variation pattern selection table N” and “small hit hour variation pattern selection table N” are set.

[Example of variation pattern selection tables A to F and N at the time of loss]
FIG. 34 is a diagram showing an example of the variation pattern selection table N at the time of loss (low probability non-time shortened state).
This selection table is a table that is used at the time of losing in the low probability non-time shortened state (when it corresponds to non-winning) (fluctuation pattern defining means). In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. “1” to “8” of “variation pattern number” are assigned to each “comparison value”.

  Fluctuation pattern numbers “1” to “5” correspond to fluctuation patterns that are out of reach without performing a reach effect, and fluctuation pattern numbers “6” to “8” are fluctuation patterns that are out of reach after reaching. It corresponds. Among these, the fluctuation pattern numbers “7” and “8” correspond to fluctuation patterns (fluctuation patterns satisfying a specific reach occurrence condition) that are lost after super reach. The variation pattern selection table may have different table contents depending on the number of operation memories at the start of variation (the same applies hereinafter).

  Here, the length of the set fluctuation time is greatly different between the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern. That is, the “non-reach fluctuation pattern” basically corresponds to a short fluctuation time (for example, about 2.0 seconds to 13.0 seconds depending on the number of working memories), whereas the “reach fluctuation pattern” This corresponds to a long fluctuation time (for example, about 30 seconds to 150 seconds) more than twice as long.

  Then, the main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, The corresponding variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determining means). For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “2” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 35 is a diagram illustrating an example of a variation pattern selection table A (low probability time reduction state) at the time of loss.
This selection table is a table that is used at the time of losing in the low probability time shortened state (when it corresponds to non-winning) (fluctuation pattern defining means). In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. “21” to “28” of “variation pattern number” are assigned to each “comparison value”.

  The variation pattern number “21” corresponds to a variation pattern that is out of reach without a reach effect, and the variation pattern numbers “22” to “28” correspond to variation patterns that are out of reach after reach. . Among these, the fluctuation pattern numbers “27” and “28” correspond to fluctuation patterns (fluctuation patterns satisfying a specific reach occurrence condition) that are lost after super reach. Further, since the variation pattern number “21” is non-reach variation due to time shortening variation, a shortened variation time (for example, about 2.0 seconds) is set as the variation time in the normal state. On the other hand, the “reach fluctuation pattern” has a long fluctuation time (for example, about 30 seconds to 150 seconds) more than twice as long.

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “22” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 36 is a diagram illustrating an example of the variation pattern selection table B at the time of loss (low probability time reduction state).
This selection table is a table that is used at the time of losing in the low probability time shortened state (when it corresponds to non-winning) (fluctuation pattern defining means). In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. For example, “255 (FFH)” is provided in the “comparison value”, and “30” of the “variation pattern number” is assigned to the “comparison value”. That is, when this selection table is used, only one variation pattern can be selected.

  The variation pattern number “30” corresponds to a variation pattern that is out of reach without a reach effect. A predetermined fixed time (for example, about 10.0 seconds) is set as the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern number “30”.

  The main control CPU 72 compares the obtained variation pattern determination random number value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table in order, but only one variation pattern is defined. A pattern number is selected (variation pattern determining means). For example, the main control CPU 72 selects “30” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 37 is a diagram illustrating an example of the variation pattern selection table C at the time of loss (low probability time reduction state).
This selection table is a table that is used at the time of losing in the low probability time shortened state (when it corresponds to non-winning) (fluctuation pattern defining means). In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. “31” to “38” of “variation pattern number” are assigned to each “comparison value”.

  The variation pattern numbers “31” to “36” correspond to variation patterns that are out of reach without performing a reach effect, and the variation pattern numbers “37” and “38” are variation patterns that are out of reach after reach. It corresponds. Further, since the variation pattern numbers “31” to “36” are non-reach variations due to time shortening variations, a shortened variation time (for example, about 2.0 seconds to 13 seconds) is set as the variation time in the normal state. Has been. On the other hand, the “reach fluctuation pattern” has a long fluctuation time (for example, about 30 seconds to 45 seconds) more than twice as long.

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “32” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

  When the three types of selection tables used at the time of deviation in the low probability time shortening state are summarized, the reach fluctuation pattern selection table A is selected more than the fluctuation pattern selection table N at the time of loss. The “fluctuation pattern selection table B at the time of loss” is configured only from a fluctuation pattern in which one kind of reach effect is not executed, and the “fluctuation pattern selection table at the time of loss” is “fluctuation at the time of loss”. The probability that the reach variation pattern is selected is lower than that of the pattern selection table N ”.

FIG. 38 is a diagram illustrating an example of the deviation variation pattern selection table D (high probability time reduction state).
This selection table is a table that is used at the time of losing in the high probability time shortened state (when it corresponds to non-winning) (fluctuation pattern defining means). In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. “41” to “48” of “variation pattern number” are assigned to each “comparison value”.

  The variation pattern number “41” corresponds to a variation pattern that is out of reach without performing a reach effect, and the variation pattern numbers “42” to “48” correspond to variation patterns that are out of reach after reach. . Among these, the fluctuation pattern numbers “47” and “48” correspond to fluctuation patterns (fluctuation patterns satisfying a specific reach occurrence condition) that are lost after super reach. Further, since the variation pattern number “41” is non-reach variation due to time shortening variation, a shortened variation time (for example, about 2.0 seconds) is set as the variation time in the normal state. On the other hand, the “reach fluctuation pattern” has a long fluctuation time (for example, about 30 seconds to 150 seconds) more than twice as long.

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “42” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 39 is a diagram illustrating an example of the variation pattern selection table E at the time of loss (high probability time reduction state).
This selection table is a table that is used at the time of losing in the high probability time shortened state (when it corresponds to non-winning) (fluctuation pattern defining means). In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. For example, “255 (FFH)” is provided for “comparison value”, and “50” of “variation pattern number” is assigned to the “comparison value”. That is, when this selection table is used, only one variation pattern can be selected.

  The variation pattern number “50” corresponds to a variation pattern that is out of reach without a reach effect. A predetermined fixed time (for example, about 10.0 seconds) is set as the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern number “50”.

  The main control CPU 72 compares the obtained variation pattern determination random number value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table in order, but only one variation pattern is defined. A pattern number is selected (variation pattern determining means). For example, the main control CPU 72 selects “50” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 40 is a diagram illustrating an example of the deviation variation pattern selection table F (high probability time reduction state).
This selection table is a table that is used at the time of losing in the high probability time shortened state (when it corresponds to non-winning) (fluctuation pattern defining means). In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. The “variation pattern number” “51” to “58” is assigned to each “comparison value”.

  The variation pattern numbers “51” to “56” correspond to variation patterns that are out of reach without performing the reach effect, and the variation pattern numbers “57” and “58” are variation patterns that are out of reach after reaching. It corresponds. Also, since the variation pattern numbers “51” to “56” are non-reach variations due to time shortening variations, a shortened variation time (for example, about 2.0 seconds to 13 seconds) is set as the variation time in the normal state. Has been. On the other hand, the “reach fluctuation pattern” has a long fluctuation time (for example, about 30 seconds to 45 seconds) more than twice as long.

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “52” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

  When the three types of selection tables used at the time of deviation in the high probability time shortening state are put together, the reach fluctuation pattern selection table D selects the reach fluctuation pattern more than the “fluctuation fluctuation pattern selection table N”. The “fluctuation pattern selection table E at the time of loss” is composed of only a fluctuation pattern in which one type of reach effect is not executed, and the “fluctuation pattern selection table at the time of loss” is “fluctuation at the time of loss”. The probability that the reach variation pattern is selected is lower than that of the pattern selection table N ”.

[See Figure 33: Special symbol change pre-processing]
The above steps S2404 and S2405 are control procedures when the big hit determination result is out of place (in the case other than non-winning), but the determination result is a big hit (step S2400: Yes) or a small hit (step S2402: Yes). The main control CPU 72 executes the following procedure. First, the case of jackpot will be described.

  Step S2410: The main control CPU 72 executes a big hit stop symbol determination process (winning type determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol (stop symbol number at the time of jackpot) for each special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) based on the jackpot symbol random number. The relationship between the jackpot symbol random number value and the type of winning symbol is defined in advance in the special symbol determination data table (winning type defining means). For this reason, the main control CPU 72 can determine the type of winning symbol based on the big hit symbol random number from the stored contents by referring to the big hit symbol stop selection table in the big hit symbol stop determination process.

[Winning pattern at the time of big hit]
In the present embodiment, there are five types of winning symbols that are selectively determined at the time of a big hit. The five types of breakdown are “10 round normal symbol”, “10 round probability variable symbol”, “16 round probability variable symbol 1”, “16 round probability variable symbol 2” and “16 round probability variable symbol 3”. Each of the five types of winning symbols may further include a plurality of winning symbols. For example, “16 round probability variation 1”, “16 round probability variation 1a”, “16 round probability variation 1b”, “16 round probability variation 1c”, and so on.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the selection ratio of the winning symbol selected at the time of the big winning of the internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol is different. For this reason, the main control CPU 72 distinguishes the winning symbol to be selected depending on whether the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

[First Special Symbol Big Stop Stop Symbol Selection Table]
FIG. 41 is a diagram showing a configuration column of the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table. When the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 refers to the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means) to determine the type of the winning symbol.

  In the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the left column shows the distribution value by winning symbol, and each distribution value “30”, “50”, “15”, “5” is the denominator. Is equivalent to the ratio when 100 is 100. In the second column from the left, “10 round normal symbol”, “10 round probability variable symbol”, “16 round probability variable symbol 1”, “16 round probability variable symbol 2” and “16” corresponding to each distribution value are displayed. Round probability variation 3 "is shown. That is, at the time of the big hit corresponding to the first special symbol, the ratio of selecting “10 round normal symbol” is 30/100 (= 30%), and the rate of selecting “10 round probability variable symbol” is 100 minutes. Of 50 (= 50%). In addition, the ratio that “16 round probability variation 1” is selected is 15/100 (= 15%), and the ratio that “16 round probability variation 2” is selected is 5/100 (= 5%). is there. The size of each distribution value corresponds to the selection ratio for each winning symbol using a jackpot symbol random number. Therefore, the selection ratio of the probability variation symbol for the first special symbol as a whole is 70%. In the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the allocation value for “16 round probability variation 3” is not set.

  In any case, if the current jackpot result corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the jackpot symbol random number, and the selection ratio shown in the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table To select the winning symbol selectively. Further, in the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as a stop symbol command at the time of winning as shown in the third column from the left. The stop symbol command is described by, for example, a combination of MODE value-EVENT value, and among these, the MODE value “B1H” of the upper byte is selected when the winning symbol of this time is the big hit of the first special symbol. Represents. Further, the EVENT values “01H”, “02H”, “03H”, and “04H” in the lower byte represent the types of winning symbols corresponding in the selection table. Therefore, for example, if the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the first special symbol, and “10 round probability variation symbol” is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command at the time of winning is described as “B1H02H” It will be.

  As described above, when the selected symbol is selected from the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process described above, for example. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines a big hit stop symbol number for the first special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Time reduction]
In the right column of the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the value of the number of time reductions (limit number) given after the end of the big hit game is shown.
In this embodiment, when it corresponds to “10 round normal symbol”, the number of time reductions is given 100 times. In addition, in the case of any of “10 round probability variation symbol”, “16 round probability variation symbol 1”, or “16 round probability variation symbol 2”, the number of time reductions is given 10,000 times.

[2nd special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table]
FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a configuration column of the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table. The main control CPU 72 determines the type of winning symbol with reference to the second special symbol big-hit stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means) when the result of the big jackpot corresponds to the second special symbol.

  Also in the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the distribution value for each winning symbol is shown in the left column, and each allocation value is “30”, “10”, “5”, “5”. , “50” corresponds to the ratio when the denominator is 100. Similarly, in the second column from the left, “10 round normal symbol”, “10 round probability variable symbol”, “16 round probability variable symbol 1”, “16 round probability variable symbol 2” and “16” corresponding to each distribution value are displayed. Round probability variation 3 "is shown. That is, at the big hit corresponding to the second special symbol, the ratio of selecting “10 round normal symbol” is 30/100 (= 30%), and the rate of selecting “10 round probability variable symbol” is It is 10/100 (= 10%). In addition, the ratio that “16 round probability variation 1” is selected is 5/100 (= 5%), and the proportion that “16 round probability variation 2” is selected is 5/100 (= 5%). is there. Furthermore, the ratio at which “16 round probability variation 3” is selected is 50/100 (= 50%). Therefore, also for the second special symbol, the selection ratio of the probability variation symbol as a whole is 70%.

  When the result of this big hit corresponds to the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the big hit symbol random number, and selects the winning symbol with the selection ratio shown in the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table To decide. Similarly, in the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as the stop symbol command at the time of winning as shown in the third column from the left. Again, the stop symbol command is described by the combination of the above MODE value-EVENT value. Among these, the MODE value “B2H” of the upper byte is the one selected when the winning symbol of the second special symbol is the current winning symbol. It represents that. Further, the EVENT values “01H”, “02H”, “03H”, “04H”, and “05H” in the lower byte represent the types of winning symbols corresponding in the selection table. Therefore, for example, if the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the second special symbol, and “10 round probability variation symbol” is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command will be described as “B2H02H”. .

  As described above, when the selected symbol is selected from the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process described above, for example. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines a big hit stop symbol number for the second special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Time reduction]
In the right column of the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the value of the number of time reductions given after the end of the big hit game is shown.
In the present embodiment, in the case of “16 round probability variation 3”, the number of time reductions is given 10,000 times. The other time reduction times are the same as in the case of a big hit with the first special symbol.

  Note that the selection ratio of the winning symbol differs between the first special symbol and the second special symbol as described above, for example, for the following reason. That is, when shifting to the “high probability state” or “time shortening state”, the variable start winning device 28 operates more frequently than in the normal time (when the time shortening function is not in operation). The working memory for the second special symbol is more easily accumulated than the working memory for. In this case, if you raise the selection ratio of “3 per 16 rounds probable big change” for the second special symbol, it will be easier to win “3 per 16 rounds probable big hit” than usual, so that will increase the player's profit accordingly This is because there is an advantage of being able to.

[See Figure 33: Special symbol change pre-processing]
Step S2412: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a big hit hour variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 changes the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number moved (shifted) to the top section of the RAM 76 in the previous step S2200. ). The main control CPU 72 sets the value of the determined variation time in the variation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time in the stop symbol display timer. In general, in the case of big hit reach fluctuation, a fluctuation time longer than that at the time of loss is determined.

  In the present embodiment, when the result of the internal lottery corresponds to a big hit of 10 rounds or a big hit of 16 rounds, for example, a “reach effect” is generated to produce a big hit. In the “big hit variation pattern selection table”, variation patterns corresponding to multiple types of “reach effects” are defined. A variation pattern will be selected. The reach production includes various reach production such as normal reach production, long reach production, super reach production, and the like. Also, when winning with the time shortening function activated, a variation pattern with a short variation time (a variation pattern without a reach effect) may be selected without selecting a variation pattern with a long variation time. Good.

[Example of variation table selection table A, D, N at the time of big hit]
FIG. 43 is a diagram showing an example of the big hit hour variation pattern selection table N (low probability non-time reduced state).
This selection table is a table used at the time of winning in the low probability non-time shortened state (fluctuation pattern defining means). In the present embodiment, the variation patterns are not distinguished for the 10-round big hit and the 16-round big hit, but a dedicated variation pattern selection table may be used for each big hit (the same applies hereinafter). In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. “61” to “68” of “variation pattern number” are assigned to each “comparison value”.

  The variation pattern numbers “61” to “68” all correspond to the variation pattern that is a hit when the reach effect is performed. Among these, the variation pattern numbers “61” to “66” correspond to the variation pattern (variation pattern satisfying a specific reach occurrence condition) that is hit after super reach.

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “62” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 44 is a diagram illustrating an example of the big hit hour variation pattern selection table A (low probability time reduction state).
This selection table is a table used at the time of winning in the low probability time shortened state (fluctuation pattern defining means). In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. “81” to “88” of “variation pattern number” are assigned to each “comparison value”.

  The variation pattern numbers “81” to “88” all correspond to the variation pattern that is a hit when the reach effect is performed. Among these, the variation pattern numbers “81” to “86” correspond to the variation pattern (a variation pattern that satisfies a specific reach occurrence condition) that is a hit after super reach.

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “82” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 45 is a diagram illustrating an example of the big hit hour variation pattern selection table D (high probability time reduction state).
This selection table is a table used at the time of winning in the high probability time shortened state (fluctuation pattern defining means). In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. The “variation pattern number” “101” to “108” is assigned to each “comparison value”.

  The variation pattern numbers “101” to “108” all correspond to the variation pattern that is a hit when the reach effect is performed. Among these, the variation pattern numbers “101” to “106” correspond to the variation pattern (variation pattern satisfying a specific reach occurrence condition) that is hit after super reach. Note that when winning in the high probability time shortening state, a variation pattern that is a hit may be set without a reach effect.

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “102” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

[See Figure 33: Special symbol change pre-processing]
Step S2414: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a big hit other setting process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines that the type of winning symbol (hit stop symbol number) determined in the previous step S2410 is “10 round probability variation symbol”, “16 round probability variation symbol 1”, “16 round probability variation symbol 2” or In the case of any one of “16 round probability variation symbols 3”, the value (01H) of the probability variation function operation flag is set as a gaming state flag in the flag area of the RAM 76 (high probability state setting means). Further, when the type of winning symbol determined in the previous step S2410 is “10 round normal symbol”, the main control CPU 72 resets the value of the probability variation function operation flag as a gaming state flag (low probability state setting means). .

  Further, the main control CPU 72 determines that the winning symbol type (stop symbol number at the time of big hit) determined in the previous step S2410 is “10 round normal symbol”, “10 round probability variable symbol”, “16 round probability variable symbol 1”, “16 In the case of either “Round Probability Variation 2” or “16 Round Probability Variation 3”, the main control CPU 72 sets the value (01H) of the time reduction function operation flag as a gaming state flag in the flag area of the RAM 76 (time reduction state) Transition means, time shortening function actuating means).

  In the process of step S2414, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (big hit symbol) by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 based on the big hit time stop symbol number. At the same time, the main control CPU 72 generates a lottery result command (at the time of the big hit) together with the stop symbol command (at the time of the big hit). The stop symbol command and the lottery result command are also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

Next, processing for small hits will be described.
Step S2407: The main control CPU 72 executes a small hit stop symbol determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of winning symbol at the time of small hit (stop symbol number at small hit) based on the big hit symbol random number. Similarly, the relationship between the big winning symbol random number value and the type of winning symbol at the time of small hitting is preliminarily defined in the special symbol selection table at small hitting (winning type defining means). In this embodiment, in order to reduce the load on the main control CPU 72, the winning symbol at the time of the small hit is determined using the big hit symbol random number, but a dedicated random number may be used separately.

[Winning pattern for small hits]
In the present embodiment, five types of winning symbols for small hits are prepared as “twice open small hit symbols”. The three types are “small hit symbol A”, “small hit symbol B”, “small hit symbol C”, “small hit symbol D”, and “small hit symbol E”. However, other types such as “one time opening small hit symbol” and “three times opening small hit symbol” may be prepared. As described above, “small hit” as a result of the internal lottery is not an opportunity for the subsequent state to change to “high probability state” or “time reduction state”, and thus is essential for this type of pachinko machine. A “one-time small hit symbol” can be provided without being bound by the definition of “two rounds (two times open) or more”.

[Small hit stop symbol selection table]
FIG. 46 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a small hit stop symbol selection table. When the result of the internal lottery this time is a small hit, the main control CPU 72 refers to this small hit stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means) to determine the type of winning symbol at the small hit.

  In the small hit stop symbol selection table, the left column shows the distribution value for each winning symbol, and each distribution value “30”, “30”, “20”, “10”, “10” This corresponds to the ratio when the denominator is 100. In the second column from the left, “small hit symbol A”, “small hit symbol B”, “small hit symbol C”, “small hit symbol D” and “small hit symbol corresponding to each distribution value are displayed. E "is shown. That is, at the time of small hit, the ratio of selecting “small hit symbol A” is 30/100 (= 30%), and the ratio of selecting “small hit symbol B” is 30/100 (= 30%). ), And the ratio that “small hit symbol C” is selected is 20/100 (= 20%), and the ratio that “small hit symbol C” is selected is 20/100 (= 20%). Yes, the ratio at which “small hit symbol D” is selected is 10/100 (= 10%), and the ratio at which “small hit symbol E” is selected is 10/100 (= 10%). The size of each distribution value corresponds to a selection ratio for each winning symbol using a big hit symbol random number (or another random number for small bonus).

  In any case, when the result of the internal lottery this time is a small hit, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the big hit symbol random number and displays the winning symbol at the selection ratio shown in the small hit stop symbol selection table. Selectively. In addition, in the small hit stop symbol selection table, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as a stop symbol command at the time of winning as shown in the third column from the left. The stop symbol command is described by, for example, a combination of MODE value-EVENT value, and among these, the MODE value “B5H” of the upper byte is selected when the current winning symbol is a small hit of the first special symbol. This means that the MODE value “B6H” in the upper byte indicates that the current winning symbol is selected when the second special symbol is hit. Further, the EVENT values “01H”, “02H”, “03H”, “04H”, and “05H” in the lower byte represent the types of winning symbols corresponding in the selection table. Therefore, for example, if the result of the small hit this time corresponds to the first special symbol, and “small hit symbol B” is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command at the time of winning is described as “B5H02H” Will be.

  As described above, when the main control CPU 72 selects a winning symbol from the small symbol stop symbol selection table, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process described above, for example. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines a small hit stop symbol number for the first special symbol (or the second special symbol) based on the selected winning symbol.

  Step S2408: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a small hit hour variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 changes the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number moved (shifted) to the top section of the RAM 76 in the previous step S2200. ) Is determined (variation pattern selection means). Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the determined variation time value in the variation timer, and sets the stop display time value in the stop symbol display timer.

  Specifically, in this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern number at the time of small hitting (variation pattern selection means) for the special symbol as in the variation pattern determination processing at the time of loss (step S2405). Since the variation time at the time of small hit differs depending on whether or not it is the above “time reduction state”, similarly to the variation time at the time of loss, in this processing, the main control CPU 72 loads the game state flag, Check whether the current state is a “time reduction state”. In the “time reduction state”, except for the case where reach fluctuation is basically performed, the fluctuation time at the time of disconnection is set to a shortened time (for example, about 2.0 seconds) (shortening fluctuation time determination means) ). In addition, even if not in the “time shortening state”, the fluctuation time at the small hit is based on, for example, “the number of operating memories at the start of fluctuation display (0 to 3)” set in step S2200, except when the reach fluctuation is performed. (For example, the number of working memories at the start of variable display is 0 → about 12.5 seconds, the number of working memories at the start of variable display is about 1 → about 8 seconds, the number of working memories at the start of variable display is 2 → About 5 seconds, the number of working memories at the start of variable display is 3 → 2.5 seconds). The symbol stop display time at the time of small hit is constant (for example, about 0.5 seconds) regardless of the variation pattern. The main control CPU 72 sets the value of the determined variation time (at the time of disconnection) in the variation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time at the time of small hitting in the stop symbol display timer.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as the “small variation pattern selection table at the time of small hits”, similarly to the “variation pattern selection table at the time of loss”, a total of seven types of selection tables of “small variation patterns selection tables A to F, N”. Is prepared, and one selection table to be used in processing to be described later is set, so that the variation pattern in the variation is determined based on the set selection table. For example, “small hit hour fluctuation pattern selection table N” is set in the low probability non-time shortened state, and any one of “small hit hour fluctuation pattern selection tables A to C” is set in the low probability time shortened state, One of the “small hit hour variation pattern selection tables D to F” is set in the high probability time shortening state. Which of the three types is set in the same gaming state is set based on a predetermined condition in the processing described later, and specific processing contents will be further described later with reference to another flowchart. It should be noted that a selection table of more or less than the following types may be prepared without being limited to these seven types, and in addition, it is common to the case of the low probability time shortening state and the case of the high probability time shortening state. It is good also as a switching fluctuation number table.

  Although a specific configuration of the “small variation pattern selection tables A to F, N” is omitted, it has the same configuration as the “loss variation pattern selection tables A to F, N”. For example, the “small hit hour variation pattern selection table A, D” is configured to have a higher probability of selecting the reach variation pattern than the “small hit hour variation pattern selection table N”, and the “small hit hour variation pattern selection table B, “E” is composed of only a variation pattern in which one kind of reach effect is not executed, and a “small hit hour variation pattern selection table C, F” has a reach variation pattern selected more than “small hit variation pattern selection table N”. Probability is low.

  Step S2409: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a small hitting and other setting process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (small hit symbol) by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 based on the stop symbol number at the time of small hit. In addition, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of a small hit) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. The stop symbol command and the lottery result command are also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

  Step S2415: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes special symbol variation start processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 selects the fluctuation pattern data based on the fluctuation pattern number (out of time / hit). At the same time, the main control CPU 72 sets a special symbol variation start flag in the flag area of the RAM 76. Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a change start command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. This variation start command is also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol changing process (step S3000) as the next jump destination and returns to the special symbol game process.

[Fig. 32: Special symbol change processing, special symbol stop display processing]
In the special symbol fluctuation processing, the main control CPU 72 loads the value of the fluctuation timer from the register to the timer counter as described above, and then the timer according to the passage of time (clock pulse count number or interrupt counter value). Decrement the counter value. Then, while referring to the value of the timer counter, the main control CPU 72 controls the special symbol variation display as described above until the value becomes zero. When the value of the timer counter becomes 0, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol stop display in-progress process (step S4000) as the next jump destination.

  In the special symbol stop display process, the main control CPU 72 controls the special symbol stop display based on the stop symbol determined in the stop symbol determination process (steps S2404, S2407, and S2410 in FIG. 33). The main control CPU 72 generates a symbol stop command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. The symbol stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process. When the stop symbol is displayed for a predetermined time in the special symbol stop display process, the main control CPU 72 deletes the symbol changing flag.

[Special symbol memory area shift processing]
FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special symbol storage area shift process. In the previous special symbol variation pre-processing, when the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is greater than “0” (step S2100: Yes in FIG. 33), the main control CPU 72 Executes this special symbol storage area shift process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S2210: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value of the operation memory counter corresponding to the second special symbol that is preferentially consumed is “0”. At this time, if the value of the operation memory counter corresponding to the second special symbol is “1” or more (No), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S2212.

  Step S2212: The main control CPU 72 designates the second special symbol as a special symbol for shifting the storage area. This designation is performed, for example, by setting “02H” as the target symbol designation value.

  Step S2214: On the other hand, when the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the second special symbol is “0” (step S2210: Yes), the main control CPU 72 uses the first special symbol as a special symbol to be shifted in the storage area. Is specified. The designation in this case is performed, for example, by setting “01H” as the target symbol designation value.

  Step S2216: The main control CPU 72 shifts the random number storage area of the RAM 76 for the target special symbol designated in either step S2212 or step S2214. The details of the specific processing are as already described in the previous special symbol change pre-processing.

  Step S2218: Next, the main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the operation memory counter for the target special symbol. For example, if the target to shift the current storage area is the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 subtracts (-1) the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the second special symbol.

  Step S2220: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets “the number of operation memories at the start of fluctuation” from the value of the operation memory counter after the subtraction. Here, for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the value of the operation memory counter may be added and the “number of operation memories at the start of change” may be set.

Step S2222: Further, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the special symbol to be shifted in the current storage area is the second special symbol.
Step S2224: When the target is the second special symbol (step S2222: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the working command when the number of working memories is reduced for the second special symbol. The effect command set here is also generated as a one-word-length command, but its structure is in contrast to the above-described “effect command when increasing the number of working memories”. That is, the production command at the time when the number of working memories decreases is lower than the value of lower bytes (for example, “00H” to “03H” that represents the number of working memories after reduction with respect to the preceding value (for example, “BCH”) of the upper bytes representing the command type )) And an additional value (for example, “10H”) meaning “decrease in the number of working memories accompanying consumption” is further added (logical sum) to the lower byte value. Therefore, for the lower byte, the second value becomes “1” by ORing the added value “10H”, and this value represents “the result (change information) due to the decrease in the number of working memories”. It will be a thing. In other words, if the lower byte of the command is “13H”, it means that the number of working memories up to the previous time “4” (command notation is “14H”) is reduced by one, so that the number of working memories this time is “3” (command The notation is “13H”). Similarly, if the lower byte is “12H” to “10H”, it means that the number of working memories “3” to “1” up to the previous time (command notation is “13H” to “11H”) is decreased by one respectively. This indicates that the current operation memory number is “2” to “0” (command notation is “12H” to “10H”). The preceding value “BCH” is a value indicating that the current effect command is the working memory number command for the second special symbol.

  Step S2226: If the current target is the first special symbol (Step S2222: No), the main control CPU 72 sets an effect command for reducing the number of working memories regarding the first special symbol. The command in this case is the same as the above except that the preceding value is a value (for example, “BBH”) indicating that the previous value is the working memory number command for the first special symbol.

Step S2228: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes an effect command output process. This process is for transmitting the production command for reducing the number of working memories set in the previous step S2224 or step S2226 to the production control device 124 (memory number notification means).
When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol variation pre-processing (FIG. 33).

[Special symbol stop display processing]
Next, FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the special symbol stop display process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S4100: The main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the stop symbol display timer (decrements by the interrupt period).

  Step S4200: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the stop display time has ended based on the value of the stop symbol display timer subtracted this time. Specifically, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is not 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has not yet ended (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process, jumps from the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 32), and repeatedly executes the special symbol stop display process in the next interrupt cycle.

  On the other hand, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has ended (Yes). In this case, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4250.

  Step S4250: The main control CPU 72 generates a symbol stop command and a stop display time end command. The symbol stop command and the stop display time end command are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process. In addition, the main control CPU 72 erases the symbol changing flag here. The “stop display time end command” is a command indicating that the stop display time of the special symbol has ended (elapsed).

  Step S4300: Here, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the big hit flag (01H) is set. When the value of the big hit flag (01H) is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4350.

[When winning]
Step S4350: The main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination of the jump table to “big winning variable winning device management process”. The main control CPU 72 executes processing for setting various functions to non-operation in this processing. Specifically, the probability variation function is deactivated and the time reduction function is deactivated. Thereby, before the special game (big player) is started, the state is shifted to the low probability non-time shortening state.

  Step S4400: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets “start of big role (during big hit game)” as an internal state flag for control. Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the continuous operation number status according to the type of jackpot symbol. For example, when the type of the jackpot symbol is “10 round normal symbol” or “10 round probability variation symbol”, a value corresponding to “10 round” is set in the continuous operation count status. When the type of jackpot symbol is “16 round probability variation symbol 1”, “16 round probability variation symbol 2” or “16 round probability variation symbol 3”, the value indicating “16 rounds” is set in the continuous operation count status. The Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a status command indicating that the big hit. The state command representing the big hit is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

  Step S4500: The main control CPU 72 generates a continuous operation number command. The continuous operation number command can be generated based on the type of big hit symbol (stop symbol number) determined in the previous big hit time stop symbol determination process (step S2410 in FIG. 33). For example, when the type of jackpot symbol is “10 round normal symbol” or “10 round probability variation symbol”, the continuous operation number command is generated as a value representing “10 rounds”. When the type of jackpot symbol is “16 round probability variation symbol 1”, “16 round probability variation symbol 2” or “16 round probability variation symbol 3”, the continuous operation number command is generated as a value representing “16 rounds”. . The generated continuous operation number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

  When the above procedure is completed at the time of the big hit, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process.

[When not winning]
On the other hand, the following procedure is executed in cases other than the big hit.
That is, if the main control CPU 72 determines in step S4300 that the value of the big hit flag (01H) is not set (No), it next executes step S4599.

  Step S4599: The main control CPU 72 executes a variation pattern selection table selection counter update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes a process related to the variation pattern selection table used in the previous process (special symbol variation pre-process). Specific processing contents will be described later with reference to another flowchart. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S4600.

  Step S4600: The main control CPU 72 next checks whether or not the value of the small hit flag (01H) is set. If the value of the small hit flag (01H) is not set and is simply shifted (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4602.

  Step S4602: The main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol variation pre-processing address as the jump destination address of the jump table. Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S4604.

  Step S4604: The main control CPU 72 executes a variation pattern selection table setting process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes a process for setting a variation pattern selection table used in the previous process (special symbol variation pre-process). Specific processing contents will be described later with reference to another flowchart. Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S4610.

  Step S4605: On the other hand, if the value of the small hit flag (01H) is set (step S4600: Yes), the main control CPU 72 uses the address of the variable winning prize management device processing at the small hit as the jump destination address of the jump table. set.

  Step S4606: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets “small hit start (during small hit)” as an internal state flag for control. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a status command indicating that a small hit is being made. The state command representing the small hit is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

  Step 4610: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the value of the count-down counter. In the “counting counter”, the counter values are set in the probability variation count area and the time reduction count area of the RAM 76 in the “high probability state” and the “time reduction state”. In this case, “number of times cut” is used, but the value of the number of times counter in the “high probability state” can be set to an extremely large value (for example, 10,000 times or more). By setting such an enormous value, it is possible to probabilistically guarantee that the “high probability state” will continue until the next winning is substantially obtained. In the case where there is only a single “time reduction state” instead of the “high probability state”, the count-off counter is set to a standard numerical value (eg, 100 times).

  Step S4620: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the loaded counter value is zero. At this time, if the count cut counter value is already 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process. On the other hand, when the count cut counter value is not 0 (No), after generating the count cut counter value command, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4630.

Step S4630: The main control CPU 72 decrements (subtracts 1) the count-down counter value.
Step S4640: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the subtraction result is not zero. As a result of the subtraction, when the value of the number cut counter is not 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process. On the other hand, if the value of the number cut counter becomes 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S4650.

  Step S4650: Here, the main control CPU 72 resets a flag at the time of turning off the number of times function. The probability variable function operation flag or the time shortening function operation flag is reset, but since the value of the count counter is not zero in the “high probability state” as described above, it is practical. It is the time reduction function activation flag that is reset above. Thereby, the time shortening state and the high probability state are ended through the special symbol stop display. When the above procedure is completed, the process returns to the special symbol game process.

[Change pattern selection table selection counter update processing]
FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the change pattern selection table selection counter update process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S4700: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the big hit post-change pattern selection counter value is larger than zero. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 refers to the big hit post-change pattern selection counter value stored in the flag counter area of the RAM 76 and confirms whether or not the value is larger than zero.

  Here, the variation pattern selection counter value after jackpot represents a value that is subtracted from the counter value set at the end of the jackpot game every time the variation display of the special symbol is finished (subtracted every variation count). Therefore, it can be said that it represents the number of fluctuations), and is related to the setting of the fluctuation pattern selection table. In addition, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or reset, the after-hit variation pattern selection counter value is set to zero.

  As a result of this confirmation, when the big hit post-change pattern selection counter value is larger than 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4702. On the other hand, if the after-hit variation pattern selection counter value is not greater than 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4704.

  Step S4702: The main control CPU 72 subtracts 1 from the big hit post-change pattern selection counter value. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 reads the big hit post-change pattern selection counter value stored in the flag counter area of the RAM 76, and stores again the value obtained by subtracting 1 from the value. Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S4704.

  Step S4704: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the variation pattern selection counter value after the small hit is larger than zero. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 refers to the after-hit variation pattern selection counter value stored in the flag counter area of the RAM 76 and confirms whether or not the value is greater than zero.

  Here, the variation pattern selection counter value after the small hit represents a value which is subtracted by 1 every time the variation display of the special symbol is completed from the counter value set at the end of the small hit game. Is involved in the setting of. Further, it is assumed that the variation pattern selection counter value after the small hit is set to 0 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or reset.

  If the result of this confirmation is that the after-hit variation pattern selection counter value is greater than 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4706. On the other hand, if the after-hit variation pattern selection counter value is not greater than 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol stop display processing (FIG. 48).

  Step S4706: The main control CPU 72 subtracts 1 from the variation pattern selection counter value after the small hit. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 reads the small hitting variation pattern selection counter value stored in the flag counter area of the RAM 76, and stores again the value obtained by subtracting 1 from the value.

  When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol stop display process (FIG. 48).

[Variation pattern selection table setting process]
FIG. 50 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the variation pattern setting process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S4720: The main control CPU 72 refers to the big hit post-change pattern selection counter value. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 refers to the big hit post-change pattern selection counter value stored in the flag counter area of the RAM 76. Note that the after-hit variation pattern selection counter value is updated (subtracted by 1) in step S4599 (FIG. 48) during the special symbol stop display process, and the updated after-hit variation pattern selection counter value is referred to. Is done. Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S4722.

  Step S4722: The main control CPU 72 refers to the switching variation number table. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 refers to a switching variation number table stored in the ROM 74 in advance. Here, the switching variation number table is a table for setting which variation pattern selection table to use based on the big hit after variation pattern selection counter value referred to in the previous process (step S4720). Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S4724.

  In the present embodiment, the switching variation number table is set with different tables to be referred to according to the gaming state. Here, in the case where the gaming state is the normal state (low probability non-time shortened state), the variation pattern selection table is fixed regardless of the big hit variation pattern selection counter value (variation pattern selection table N). The switching variation number table for the normal state is not defined. Therefore, this process (step S4722) may be ignored. On the other hand, when the gaming state is a low probability time shortening state and when the gaming state is a high probability time shortening state, different switching variation number tables are defined, and each will be specifically described. As another embodiment, a common switching variation number table may be used for the low probability time shortening state and the high probability time shortening state.

[Switching fluctuation number table A (low probability time shortened state)]
FIG. 51 is a diagram illustrating an example of the switching variation number table A (low probability time reduction state).
This switching variation number table is a table used in the case of a low probability time shortening state. In addition, the switching variation number table has a structure in which, for example, a “switching variation number” and a “switching variation pattern selection table” are stored as a set in order from the top address. Here, the number of switching fluctuations represents the value of the number of fluctuations of a special symbol as a guide for switching the fluctuation pattern selection table, and the switching fluctuation pattern selection table represents a fluctuation pattern selection table after switching. For example, different values “95”, “90”, “80”, “70”,..., “0” are provided in the “switching variation number”. A “variation pattern selection table” is assigned. The switching variation pattern selection table defines a variation pattern selection table used at the time of loss, a variation pattern selection table used at the time of big hit, and a variation pattern selection table used at the time of small hit.

  The switching variation pattern selection tables such as the switching variation numbers “95” and “80” correspond to the variation pattern selection table B for loss, the variation pattern selection table A for big hit, and the variation pattern selection table B for small hit. The switching variation pattern selection tables such as the switching variation numbers “90” and “70” correspond to the variation pattern selection table A at the time of loss, the variation pattern selection table A at the time of big hit, and the variation pattern selection table A at the time of small hit. . Further, the switching variation pattern selection table with the switching variation number “0” corresponds to the variation pattern selection table N at the time of loss, the variation pattern selection table N at the time of big hit, and the variation pattern selection table N at the time of small hit.

[Switching fluctuation number table B (high probability time shortened state)]
FIG. 52 is a diagram showing an example of the switching fluctuation number table B (high probability time shortening state).
This switching variation number table is a table used in the case of a high probability time reduction state. In addition, the switching variation number table has a structure in which, for example, a “switching variation number” and a “switching variation pattern selection table” are stored as a set in order from the top address. For example, different values “99995”, “9990”, “9980”, “9970”,..., “0” are provided in “switching fluctuation number”. A “variation pattern selection table” is assigned. The switching variation pattern selection table defines a variation pattern selection table used at the time of loss, a variation pattern selection table used at the time of big hit, and a variation pattern selection table used at the time of small hit.

  The switching variation pattern selection tables such as the number of switching variations “9995” and “9980” correspond to the variation pattern selection table E at the time of loss, the variation pattern selection table D at the time of big hit, and the variation pattern selection table D at the time of small hit. Further, switching variation pattern selection tables such as the number of switching variations “9990” and “9970” correspond to the variation pattern selection table D at the time of loss, the variation pattern selection table D at the time of big hit, and the variation pattern selection table D at the time of small hit. . Further, the switching variation pattern selection table with the switching variation number “0” corresponds to the variation pattern selection table N at the time of loss, the variation pattern selection table N at the time of big hit, and the variation pattern selection table N at the time of small hit.

[See FIG. 50: Variation Pattern Selection Table Setting Process]
Step S4724: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the big hit post-change pattern selection counter value is equal to the switching change number. Specifically, whether or not the big hit after fluctuation pattern selection counter value referred in the previous process (step S4720) is equal to the value of the switching fluctuation number defined in the table referred to in the previous process (step S4722). To check. As a result of the confirmation, if the big hit post-change pattern selection counter value is equal to the switching change number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4726. On the other hand, if the after-hit variation pattern selection counter value is not equal to the switching variation number (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4730. When the gaming state is a normal state (low probability non-time shortened state), the switching step number table is not referred to in the previous process (step S4722), so the next step is not performed without comparing the values. S4730 may be executed.

  Step S4726: The main control CPU 72 sets a variation pattern selection table according to the switching variation number table. Specifically, the switching fluctuation number table (switching fluctuation number table A in the low probability time shortening state and switching fluctuation number table B in the high probability time shortening state) referred to according to the current gaming state and the big hit after fluctuation pattern Based on the selection counter value (the number of switching fluctuations), a fluctuation pattern selection table to be used is set.

  For example, when the gaming state is a low probability time shortening state and the variation pattern selection counter value after the big hit is “95” or “80”, the variation pattern selection table to be used from now on is the variation pattern selection at the time of loss. Table B, big hit variation pattern selection table A, and small hit variation pattern selection table B. In addition, when the gaming state is a low probability time shortening state and the variation pattern selection counter value after the big hit is “90” or “70”, the variation pattern selection table to be used from now on is the variation pattern selection at the time of loss. Table A, big hit time fluctuation pattern selection table A, and small hit time fluctuation pattern selection table A.

  On the other hand, for example, when the gaming state is a state with a high probability time reduction and the after-hit variation pattern selection counter value is “9995” or “9980”, the variation pattern selection table to be used from now on is the variation at the time of loss. The pattern selection table E, the big hit variation pattern selection table D, and the small hit variation pattern selection table E. Further, when the gaming state is a low probability time shortening state and the after-hit variation pattern selection counter values are “9990” and “9970”, the variation pattern selection table to be used from now on will be the variation pattern selection at the time of loss. Table D, big hit time fluctuation pattern selection table D, and small hit time fluctuation pattern selection table D.

  As described above, when the setting of the variation pattern selection table to be used is finished, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol stop display process (FIG. 48).

  Step S4730: The main control CPU 72 confirms the currently set variation pattern selection table. For example, the variation pattern selection table for loss time is defined as a total of seven types of “change time variation pattern selection tables A to F, N”, and it is confirmed which one is used. Note that for big hits, there is only one variation pattern selection table for each gaming state, so there is no need to confirm. For small hits, the same pattern number as that used for breakage (for example, the variation pattern for breakout) In the case of the selection table C, it is not necessary to check because the small hit hour variation pattern selection table C is applicable). The main control CPU 72 next executes step S4732.

  Step S4732: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the currently set variable pattern selection table C or F is set. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the type of the variation pattern selection table confirmed in the previous process (step S4730) is the variation pattern selection table C or the variation pattern selection table F. As a result of this confirmation, if the currently set variable pattern selection table C or F is Yes (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4734. On the other hand, if it is not the variation pattern selection table C or F that is currently set (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4738.

  Step S4734: The main control CPU 72 refers to the variation pattern selection counter value after the small hit. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 refers to the after-hit variation pattern selection counter value stored in the flag counter area of the RAM 76. Here, the variation pattern selection counter value after the small hit represents a value obtained by subtracting the number of times the special symbol variation display has been performed from the predetermined number when a predetermined number (for example, 20) is set at the end of the small hit. Yes. Since the variation pattern selection table C or F is a variation pattern selection table set at the end of the small hit, the variation pattern selection table C or F can be used as the variation pattern selection counter value after the small hit. Represents the number of times. Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S4736.

  Step S4736: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the small hitting variation pattern selection counter value is zero. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the small hitting variation pattern selection counter value referred to in the previous process (step S4734) is zero. As a result of this confirmation, if the small hitting variation pattern selection counter value is 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4740. On the other hand, if the variation pattern selection counter value after the small hit is not 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4738.

  Step S4738: The main control CPU 72 sets the current variation pattern selection table without changing it. Specifically, the variation pattern selection table confirmed in the previous process (step S4730) is set as the variation pattern selection table to be used from now on.

  Step S4740: The main control CPU 72 sets a variation pattern selection table according to the current gaming state. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets a variation pattern selection table defined in advance for each gaming state as a variation pattern selection table to be used. For example, when the gaming state is a normal state (low probability non-time shortening state), the variation that will be used from the variation pattern selection table N at the time of loss, the variation pattern selection table N at the time of big hit, and the variation pattern selection table N at the time of small hit Set as a pattern selection table. For example, when the gaming state is a low probability time shortening state, the variation pattern selection table A at the time of loss, the variation pattern selection table A at the time of big hit, and the variation pattern selection table A at the time of small hit are set as the variation pattern selection tables to be used from now on. To do. For example, when the gaming state is a high probability time shortening state, the variation pattern selection table D at the time of loss, the variation pattern selection table D at the time of big hit, and the variation pattern selection table D at the time of small hit are set as variation pattern selection tables to be used from now on. To do.

  When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol stop display process (FIG. 48).

[Display output management processing]
Next, FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 27) executed in the interrupt management process. The display output management process includes a special symbol display setting process (step S1200), a normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), a state display setting process (step S1220), an operation memory display setting process (step S1230), and a continuous operation number display setting. This is a configuration including a subroutine group of processing (step S1240).

  Among these, the special symbol display setting process (step S1200), the normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), and the operation memory display setting process (step S1230) are the first special symbol display device 34, the second, as already described. Generates drive signals to be applied to the LEDs of the special symbol display device 35, the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, and the second special symbol operation memory number display lamp 35a. And output processing.

  The state display setting process (step S1220) and the continuous operation number display setting process (step S1240) are processes for generating and outputting a drive signal to be applied to each LED of the gaming state display device 38. First, in the state display setting process, the main control CPU 72 controls the lighting of the probability variation state display lamp 38d and the short time state display lamp 38e, respectively, according to the value of the probability variation function activation flag or the time reduction function activation flag. For example, if the value (01H) is set in the probability variation function operation flag when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the probability variation state display lamp 38d. The probability variation state display lamp 38d continues to be lit until the jackpot game related to the special symbol is started or until the probability variation function is turned off after the special symbol variation display has been performed a predetermined number of times. The display can be switched (off). On the other hand, if the value (01H) is set in the time reduction function operation flag, the main control CPU 72 turns on the lighting signal for the LED corresponding to the time reduction state display lamp 38e regardless of whether or not the power is turned on. Is output. Further, the main control CPU 72 controls the lighting of the launch position designation lamp 38f in accordance with the special game management status. For example, when the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is activated due to the big hit game or the small hit game, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the launch position designation lamp 38f. . If the value (01H) is set in the time reduction function operation flag, the main control CPU 72 gives a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the launch position designation lamp 38f in addition to the above-mentioned time reduction state display lamp 38e. Output. Note that the launch position designation lamp 38f is turned on from the start of the big hit game until the end of the "time reduced state" when the game is shifted to the "time reduced state" through the big hit game, and is not turned on when the "time reduced state" ends ( OFF).

  The main control CPU 72 controls lighting of the big hit type display lamps 38a and 38b in the continuous operation number display setting process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal for one of the big hit type display lamps 38a and 38b based on the value of the above-mentioned continuous operation number status. At this time, one of the display lamps 38a and 38b corresponding to the jackpot symbol designated by the value of the continuous operation number status is the target of outputting the lighting signal. For example, if the value of the continuous operation number status designates “10 rounds”, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 38 a representing “10 rounds (10R)”. Further, if the value of the continuous operation count status specifies “16 rounds”, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 38b representing “16 rounds (16R)”.

[Variable winning device management process for big hits]
Next, details of the big win variable winning device management process will be described. FIG. 54 is a flowchart illustrating a configuration example of the big win variable winning device management process. The jackpot variable winning device management process includes a jackpot gaming process selection process (step S5100), a jackpot big winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S5200), a jackpot big winning opening / closing operation process (step S5300), and a big hit big This is a configuration including a subroutine group of a winning opening closing process (step S5400) and a big hit end process (step S5500).

  Step S5100: In the big hit game process selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any one of steps S5200 to S5500). That is, the main control CPU 72 selects the program address of the process to be executed next from the jump table as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the big win variable winning device management process in the stack pointer as the return address. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the operation (opening / closing operation) of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 has not been started yet, the main control CPU 72 sets the big hit time big winning opening opening pattern setting process as the next jump destination. (Step S5200) is selected. On the other hand, if the big hit special prize opening pattern setting process has already been completed, the main control CPU 72 selects the big hit special prize opening / closing operation processing (step S5300) as the next jump destination, and the big hit special prize opening / closing operation is performed. If the operation process has been completed, the big hit special prize closing process (step S5400) is selected as the next jump destination. When the big hit big prize opening / closing operation process and the big hit big prize opening closing process are repeatedly executed over the set number of continuous operations (number of rounds), the main control CPU 72 performs the big hit end process ( Step S5500) is selected. Hereinafter, each process will be described in more detail.

[Big prize opening pattern setting process for big hits]
FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a big winning prize opening opening pattern setting process. This process is for setting conditions such as the number of times the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is opened / closed and the time of each opening at the time of a big hit. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S5204: The main control CPU 72 executes a design-specific release pattern selection process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the winning pattern opening pattern (number of times of opening for each round and the time of each opening), the interval time between rounds, and the number of counts in one round (maximum) according to the current winning symbol. Set the number of winnings). Note that the opening pattern for each winning symbol is as described in the item “plurality of winning types” in the special symbol game process (FIG. 32). The interval time between rounds is any one of “10 round normal symbol”, “10 round probability variable symbol”, “16 round probability variable symbol 1”, “16 round probability variable symbol 2” or “16 round probability variable symbol 3”. However, it is set to about 2 seconds to 2.5 seconds, for example. However, the interval time between the 10th and 11th rounds in the case of “16-round probability variation 1” or “16-round probability variation 2” is the scale for the continuous round judgment production (treasure challenge production). In order to ensure, it can be set relatively long (for example, about 30 seconds). Note that the number of counts in one round (maximum number of winnings) is, for example, 9 for all winning symbols, but winnings rarely occur during an extremely short opening (about 0.1 seconds) ( Not impossible but extremely difficult).

  Step S5206: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds in the current jackpot game based on the winning symbol selected in the big jackpot stop symbol determination process (step S2410 in FIG. 33). Specifically, if the major category “10 round normal symbol” or “10 round probability variation symbol” is selected as the winning symbol, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds to ten. Further, if “16 round probability variation symbol 1”, “16 round probability variation symbol 2” or “16 round probability variation symbol 3” is selected as the winning symbol, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds to 16 times. The number of execution rounds set here is stored as a corresponding value on the program (“9” for 10 times, “15” for 16 times), for example, in the buffer area of the RAM 76.

  Step S5208: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets a big hit opening timer based on the big winning opening opening pattern set in the previous step S5204. The timer value set here is the opening time per operation when the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is operated. If a value of about 29.0 seconds is set as the value of the big hit opening timer, the opening time easily occurs in the first big winning opening or the second big winning opening during one opening. Sufficient time (for example, a time during which 10 or more game balls are fired by the firing control board set 174, preferably 6 seconds or more). On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot opening timer is set to 0.1 seconds, the opening time is that even if it is not possible to enter the first grand prize winning opening or the second big winning prize opening during one opening, It is a short time (which becomes difficult) that hardly occurs (for example, a time shorter than 1 second, preferably a time shorter than the shooting interval of the game balls by the shooting control board set 174).

  Step S5210: The main control CPU 72 sets a big hit interval timer based on the big winning opening opening pattern set in the previous step S5204. The timer value set here is the waiting time between rounds of big hits.

  Step S5212: When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big win time big opening / closing operation process, and returns to the big win time variable winning device management process (FIG. 54).

[Big prize opening and closing operation processing at big hit]
FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the big winning prize opening / closing operation process at the big hit. This process is for controlling the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 at the time of big hit. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along a procedure.

  Step S5301: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the interval timer is counting down. Specifically, whether or not the interval timer is counting down can be confirmed by confirming whether or not the interval timer set in step S5314 is already in operation.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the interval timer is counting down (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes Step S5314. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the interval timer is counting down (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5302.

  Step S5302: The main control CPU 72 opens the first big prize opening or the second big prize opening. Specifically, a drive signal applied to the first big prize opening solenoid 90 or the second big prize opening solenoid 97 is output. Thereby, the 1st variable winning device 30 or the 2nd variable winning device 31 operates, and it shifts from a closed state to an open state.

  Step S5304: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes an open timer countdown process. In this process, the countdown of the release timer set in the previous big hit time big opening opening pattern setting process (step S5208 in FIG. 55) is executed.

  Step S5306: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time has expired. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the release timer after the countdown process is 0 or less. If the value of the release timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5308. Execute.

  Step S5308: The main control CPU 72 executes a winning ball count process. In this process, the number of game balls that have entered the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 (the first large winning port or the second large winning port being opened) within the opening time is counted. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 increments the count value based on the winning detection signal input from the first count switch 84 or the second count switch 85 within the opening time.

  Step S5310: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the current count number is less than a predetermined number (9). This predetermined number defines the upper limit of the number of winning balls (upper limit of the number of winning balls) allowed per opening (one round of big hit) as described above. If the count has not yet reached the predetermined number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the big win time variable winning device management process. Next, when the big win variable winning device management process is executed, since the jump destination is set to the big win big prize opening / closing operation process at the present stage, the main control CPU 72 performs the procedure of the above steps S5301 to S5310. Run repeatedly.

  If it is determined in step S5306 that the opening time has expired (Yes), or if it is confirmed in step S5310 that the count has reached a predetermined number (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5312.

  Step S5312: The main control CPU 72 closes the first big prize opening or the second big prize opening. Specifically, the output of the drive signal applied to the first big prize opening solenoid 90 or the second big prize opening solenoid 97 is stopped. As a result, the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 returns from the open state to the closed state.

  Step S5314: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes an interval timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes the count-down of the interval timer set in the big hit time big opening opening pattern setting process (step S5210 in FIG. 55).

  Step S5315: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the interval time has ended. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the interval timer after the countdown processing is 0 or less. If the value of the interval timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 is able to win the variable variable prize at the big hit. Return to the end address of the device management process (FIG. 54). Then, when the jackpot big winning opening / closing operation processing is executed in the next call, the process jumps from the top step S5301 and immediately executes step S5314. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the value of the interval timer after the countdown process has become 0 or less (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5318.

  Step S5318: The main control CPU 72 increments the value of the opening number counter. Note that the value of the number-of-releases counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76 with an initial value of 0, for example.

  Step S5320: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value of the incremented number-of-releases counter has reached the number set within the current round. Here, the “number of times set in the current round” is determined, for example, “the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 are opened multiple times within one round of big hit” This is to cope with the open pattern. In the present embodiment, since such an open pattern is not particularly employed, the “number of times set in the current round” is set once for each round. Therefore, since the counter value reaches the set number of times in one opening / closing operation (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next proceeds to step S5322.

  If a pattern in which a plurality of opening / closing operations are repeated in one round as described above is employed, the counter value has not yet reached the set number of times at the end of one opening (No). In this case, when the main control CPU 72 returns to the big win variable winning device management process, since the jump destination is set to the big win big prize opening / closing operation process at this stage, the procedure from step S5301 to step S5320 is performed. Run repeatedly. As a result, the increment of the number-of-releases counter proceeds in step S5318, and when the counter value reaches the set number of times (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S5322.

  Step S5322: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning big prize opening closing process, and returns to the big win variable winning device management process. Then, when the big win time variable winning device management process is executed, the main control CPU 72 next executes a big hit time big winning opening closing process.

[Closing the big prize at the big hit]
FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the big winning prize closing process. This big winning time big winning opening closing process is for continuing the operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 or terminating the operation. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along a procedure.

  Step S5402: The main control CPU 72 increments the round number counter. Thereby, for example, the value of the round number counter is “1” at the stage where the first round ends and the second round is reached.

  Step S5404: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the incremented round number counter value has reached the set number of execution rounds. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value (1 to 15) of the round number counter after increment, and if the value is less than the set number of execution rounds (1 to 15 after 1 subtraction) (No) Next, step S5405 is executed.

  Step S5405: The main control CPU 72 generates a round number command from the current round number counter value. This command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process as described above. The effect control device 124 can confirm the current number of rounds based on the received round number command.

  Step S5406: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination in the big hit big prize opening / closing operation process.

  Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the big win time variable winning device management process.

  Next, when the main control CPU 72 executes the big hit variable winning device management process, the main control CPU 72 in the big hit game process selection process (step S5100 in FIG. 54), the big jump time big winning opening / closing operation process is the next jump destination. Execute. Then, after the execution of the jackpot big winning opening opening / closing operation process, the main control CPU 72 executes the big hit big winning opening closing process again, and the above steps S5402 to S5408 are executed. Run repeatedly. Thus, the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is continuously executed until the actual round number reaches the set execution round number (10 times or 16 times).

  When the actual number of rounds reaches the set number of execution rounds (step S5404: YES), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5410.

  Step S5410, Step S5412: In this case, when the main control CPU 72 resets the round number counter (= 0), it sets the next jump destination to the big hit end processing.

  Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the big win time variable winning device management process. As a result, when the main control CPU 72 next executes the jackpot variable winning device management process, the jackpot end process is selected this time.

[End processing at jackpot]
FIG. 58 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the big hit end processing. This big-hit end process is for preparing conditions for ending the operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 at the time of the big hit. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S5501: The main control CPU 72 executes a big hit end time timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets an initial value for the jackpot end time timer, and then counts down the timer as time elapses (each time this module is called).

  Step S5502: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the big hit end time has elapsed. Specifically, if the value of the big hit end time timer is not yet 0, the main control CPU 72 determines that the big hit end time has not elapsed (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 ends this module and returns to the big win variable winning device management process (FIG. 54).

  Thereafter, when the value of the big hit time end timer becomes 0 with the passage of time, the main control CPU 72 determines that the big hit time end time has passed (Yes), and executes step S5503 and subsequent steps.

  Step S5503, Step S5504: The main control CPU 72 resets the big hit flag (00H). As a result, the big hit gaming state ends on the control processing of the main control CPU 72. In addition, the main control CPU 72 deletes “big hit” from the internal state flag and declares the end of the major role as the internal state in the control processing. The main control CPU 72 resets the value of the continuous operation number status.

  Step S5506: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value (01H) of the probability variation function operation flag is set. This flag is set in the big hit other setting process (step S2414 in FIG. 33) during the previous special symbol fluctuation pre-process.

  Step S5508: When the value of the probability variation function operation flag is set (step S5506: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the probability variation number (for example, about 10,000 times). The set value of the probability variation number is stored, for example, in the probability variation counter area of the RAM 76 and becomes the above-described number cut counter value. The probability variation number set here is the upper limit number of times that the variation of the special symbol (internal lottery) is performed in a high probability state in the subsequent games. However, if a huge number of times such as 10,000 is set as described above, there is almost no chance that the non-winning will continue so far (the winning probability at the time of high probability is, for example, 1/39 to 1/39) The degree of probability) will continue until the next winning. On the other hand, when a substantial upper limit is set in the high probability state, the probability variation number is set to a realistic number (for example, about 70 times) (so-called number cut probability change). If the value of the probability variation function activation flag is not set (step S5506: No), the main control CPU 72 does not execute step S5508.

  Step S5510: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value of the time reduction function operation flag (01H) is set. This flag is also set in the big hit other setting process (step S2414 in FIG. 33) during the previous special symbol fluctuation pre-processing.

  Step S5512: If the value of the time reduction function activation flag is set (step S5510: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the number of time reductions (for example, 10,000 times or 100 times). The value of the set time reduction count is stored in the time count area of the RAM 76 as described above. The number of times of time reduction set here is the upper limit number of times to shorten the variation time of the special symbol in subsequent games. If the value of the time shortening function activation flag is not set (step S5510: No), the main control CPU 72 does not execute step S5512.

  Step S5513: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a big hit end variation pattern selection table setting process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets a variation pattern selection table to be used. The specific processing content will be further described later with reference to another flowchart.

  Step S5514: Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a state designation command based on various flags. Specifically, a state designation command representing “normal” is generated as the gaming state when the big hit flag is reset or the big game ends. If the high-probability state function activation flag is set, a state designation command indicating “high probability” is generated as the internal state, and if the time reduction function activation flag is set, the internal state is “reduced time”. A state designation command representing “medium” is generated. These state designation commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

  Step S5516: After the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination in the big hit time big winning opening releasing pattern setting process.

  Step S5518: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination in the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 32) in the special symbol game process as the special symbol variation pre-process. When the above procedure is finished, the main control CPU 72 returns to the big win variable winning device management process.

[Change pattern selection table setting process at end of jackpot]
FIG. 59 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the big hit end variation pattern selection table setting process.

  Step S5700: The main control CPU 72 confirms each operation flag. Each operation flag to be confirmed here represents a variation time shortening function operation flag and a probability variation function operation flag. Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S5702.

  Step S5702: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the variable time shortening function activation flag is 1. This flag is set in the big hit other setting process (step S2414 in FIG. 33) during the previous special symbol fluctuation pre-process. As a result of this confirmation, when the variable time shortening function activation flag is 1 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5704. On the other hand, if the variable time shortening function activation flag is not 1 (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5710. In the present embodiment, the variable time shortening function operation flag is set to 1 after the end of all big hit games. However, in another embodiment, the variable time shortening function operation flag is set to 1 after the big hit game ends. If not set, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5710.

  Step S5704: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the probability variation function activation flag is 1. This flag is also set in the big hit other setting process (step S2414 in FIG. 33) during the previous special symbol fluctuation pre-processing. If the result of this confirmation is that the probability variation function activation flag is 1 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5708. On the other hand, if the probability variation function operation flag is not 1 (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5706.

  Step S5706: The main control CPU 72 sets the variation pattern selection table A. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the variation pattern selection table A at the time of loss, the variation pattern selection table A at the time of big hits, and the variation pattern selection table A at the time of small hits as variation pattern selection tables to be used from now on. Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S5712.

  Step S5708: The main control CPU 72 sets the variation pattern selection table D. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the variation pattern selection table D at the time of loss, the variation pattern selection table D at the time of big hits, and the variation pattern selection table D at the time of small hits as variation pattern selection tables to be used. Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S5713.

  Step S5710: The main control CPU 72 sets the variation pattern selection table N. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the fluctuation pattern selection table N at the time of loss, the fluctuation pattern selection table N at the time of big hits, and the fluctuation pattern selection table N at the time of small hits as fluctuation pattern selection tables to be used from now on. Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S5713.

  Step S5712: The main control CPU 72 sets the big hit post-change pattern selection counter value to 100. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets and stores 100 as the after-hit variation pattern selection counter value in the flag counter area of the RAM 76. The big hit after fluctuation pattern selection counter value is decremented by 1 each time the special symbol fluctuation display is completed in another process (step S4702: FIG. 49).

  Step S5713: The main control CPU 72 sets the big hit post-change pattern selection counter value to 10,000. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets and stores 10000 as the after-hit variation pattern selection counter value in the flag counter area of the RAM 76. The big hit after fluctuation pattern selection counter value is decremented by 1 each time the special symbol fluctuation display is completed in another process (step S4702: FIG. 49).

  When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the big hit end processing (FIG. 58).

[Variable winning device management process for small hits]
Next, details of the small winning time variable winning device management process will be described. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the small winning hour variable winning device management process. The small winning time prize winning device management process includes a small winning game process selection process (step S6100), a small winning time big prize opening opening pattern setting process (step S6200), and a small hitting big prize opening opening / closing operation process (step S6300). The sub-group includes a subroutine group of a small winning big prize opening closing process (step S6400) and a small winning end process (step S6500).

  Step S6100: In the small hit game process selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects a jump destination of a process to be executed next (any one of steps S6200 to S6500). That is, the main control CPU 72 selects the program address of the process to be executed next from the jump table as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the small winning hour variable winning device management process in the stack pointer as the return address. . Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the operation (opening / closing operation) of the first variable winning device 30 has not started yet, the main control CPU 72 selects the small winning big opening opening pattern setting process (step S6200) as the next jump destination. To do. On the other hand, if the small winning big winning opening opening pattern setting processing has already been completed, the main control CPU 72 selects the small winning big winning opening opening / closing operation processing (step S6300) as the next jump destination, If the winning opening / closing operation processing has been completed, the small winning big winning opening closing process (step S6400) is selected as the next jump destination. When the small hitting big winning opening opening / closing operation process and the small hitting big winning opening closing process are repeatedly executed over the set number of continuous operations, the main control CPU 72 performs the small hitting end process (step) as the next jump destination. S6500) is selected. Hereinafter, each process will be described in more detail.

[Big winning opening opening pattern setting process for small hits]
FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the small winning big prize opening opening pattern setting process. This process is for setting conditions such as the number of times that the first variable prize-winning device 30 is opened and closed at the time of a small hit and the time for each opening. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S6212: The main control CPU 72 sets a “small hit opening pattern”. In the case of the present embodiment, for the “small hit opening pattern”, for example, an opening pattern of “0.1 second opening” is set for the first time and the second time. Since “small hit” has no concept of “round”, “open pattern” is also expressed as “first open” and “second open”.

  Step S6214: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of times of opening the first big prize opening to, for example, two, based on the big prize opening opening pattern set in the previous step S6212. The number of releases set here is stored in a buffer area of the RAM 76, for example.

  Step S6216: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets a small hitting release timer. The timer value set here is the opening time per operation when the first variable winning device 30 is operated. In this embodiment, as described above, 0.1 seconds is set as the value of the small hitting release timer, and such an opening time is a ball entering the first big prize opening during one opening. Is a short time (which becomes difficult) (for example, a time shorter than 1 second, preferably a time shorter than a game ball firing interval by the launcher unit).

  Step S6218: The main control CPU 72 sets a small hitting interval timer. The timer value set here is a waiting time for each time when the first variable prize-winning apparatus 30 is opened and closed a plurality of times at the time of a small hit, and this timer value is set to about 2 seconds, for example.

  Step S6220: When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the small winning big prize opening / closing operation process and returns to the small winning variable winning device management process (FIG. 60). The main control CPU 72 then executes a small winning big prize opening / closing operation process (step S6300).

[Large winning opening and closing operation processing for small hits]
FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the small winning big prize opening opening / closing operation process. This process is for controlling the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 at the time of a small hit. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along a procedure.

  Step S6301: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the interval timer is counting down. Specifically, it can be confirmed whether or not the interval timer is counting down by confirming whether or not the interval timer set in the following step S6314 is already operating.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the interval timer is counting down (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes Step S6314. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the interval timer is counting down (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S6302.

  Step S6302: The main control CPU 72 opens the first big prize opening. Specifically, a drive signal applied to the first grand prize winning solenoid 90 is output. Thereby, the 1st variable prize-winning apparatus 30 operate | moves and it transfers from a closed state to an open state.

  Step S6304: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes an open timer countdown process. In this process, the countdown of the opening timer set in the previous small hitting big opening opening pattern setting process (step S6216 in FIG. 61) is executed.

  Step S6306: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time has expired. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the release timer after the countdown process is 0 or less. If the value of the release timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S6308. Execute.

  Step S6308: The main control CPU 72 executes a winning ball count process. In this process, the number of game balls that have entered the first variable prize-winning device 30 (first big prize opening being opened) within the opening time is counted. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 increments the count value based on the winning detection signal input from the first count switch 84 within the opening time.

  Step S6310: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the current count number is less than a predetermined number (9). This predetermined number defines the upper limit of the number of winning balls (upper limit of the number of winning balls) allowed per opening (one opening at the time of a small hit) as described above. If the count number has not yet reached the predetermined number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the small winning time variable winning device management process (FIG. 60). Next, when the small winning hour variable winning device management process is executed, since the jump destination is set to the small winning big prize opening / closing operation process at the present stage, the main control CPU 72 performs the above steps S6301 to S6310. Repeat the procedure.

  If it is determined in step S6306 that the opening time has expired (Yes), or if it is confirmed in step S6310 that the count has reached a predetermined number (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S6312. Here, since the value of the release timer is set for a short time, the main control CPU 72 normally performs step opening before confirming that the count number has reached the predetermined number in step S6310. In most cases, it is determined in S6306 that the opening time has expired.

  Step S6312: The main control CPU 72 closes the first big prize opening. Specifically, the output of the drive signal applied to the first grand prize winning solenoid 90 is stopped. Thereby, the 1st variable prize-winning apparatus 30 returns from an open state to a closed state.

  Step S6314: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes an interval timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes a countdown of the interval timer set in the above-described small hitting big prize opening opening pattern setting process (step S6218 in FIG. 61).

  Step S6315: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the interval time has ended. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the interval timer after the countdown process is 0 or less. If the value of the interval timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 can change the small hit time. Return to the end address of the winning device management process (FIG. 60). Then, when the small winning big prize opening / closing operation process is executed in the next call, the process jumps from the top step S6301 and immediately executes step S6314. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the value of the interval timer after the countdown process has become 0 or less (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S6316.

  Step S6316: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the small winning big winning opening closing process, and returns to the small winning variable winning device management process. Next, when the small winning hour variable winning device management process is executed, the main control CPU 72 next executes a small hitting big prize opening closing process.

[Closed big prize opening closing process]
FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the small winning big winning opening closing process. The small winning big winning opening closing process is for continuing the operation of the first variable winning device 30 or terminating the operation. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along a procedure.

  Step S6412: The main control CPU 72 increments the value of the opening number counter.

  Step S6414: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value of the incremented number-of-releases counter has reached the set number of times of release. The number of times of opening is set in the previous big opening opening pattern setting process (step S6214 in FIG. 61). If the value of the opening number counter has not yet reached the set opening number (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S6416.

Step S6416: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big hit prize opening / closing operation process.
Step S6430: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the small hitting time variable winning device management process (FIG. 60).

  When the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the main control CPU 72 performs a small winning game big opening / closing operation process in the small jump game process selection process (step S6100 in FIG. 60). Execute. After executing the small winning big prize opening / closing operation process, the main control CPU 72 again executes the small winning big prize opening closing process until the actual number of times of opening reaches the set number of opening times (two times). The opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 is repeatedly executed.

  When the actual number of times of opening at the time of the small hit reaches the set number of times of opening (step S6414: Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S6418.

  Step S6418, Step S6420: In this case, when the main control CPU 72 resets the release number counter (= 0), it sets the next jump destination to the small hit end processing.

  Step S6430: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the small hitting time variable winning device management process (FIG. 60). As a result, when the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the small hitting end process is selected this time.

[End processing for small hits]
FIG. 64 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the small hit end processing. This small hitting end process is for preparing conditions for ending the operation of the first variable winning device 30 at the small hitting. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S6502: The main control CPU 72 executes a small hitting end time timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets an initial value for the small hitting end time timer, and then counts down the timer as time elapses (each time this module is called).

  Step S6504: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the small hitting end time has elapsed. Specifically, if the value of the small hitting end time timer is not yet 0, the main control CPU 72 determines that the small hitting end time has not elapsed (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 ends the present module and returns to the small winning time variable winning device management process (FIG. 60).

  Thereafter, when the value of the small hitting end time timer becomes 0 with the passage of time, the main control CPU 72 determines that the small hitting end time has elapsed (Yes), and executes step S6506 and subsequent steps.

  Step S6506, Step S6508: The main control CPU 72 resets the value of the small hit flag (00H), deletes “meeting small hit” from the internal state flag, and ends the small hit game. It should be noted that in the case of a small hit, the internal condition device does not operate in particular, so such a procedure is merely for the purpose of erasing the flag.

  Step S6509: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a small hit hour variation pattern selection table setting process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets a variation pattern selection table to be used. The specific processing content will be further described later with reference to another flowchart.

  Step S6510: After the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination in the small winning big opening opening pattern setting process.

  Step S6512: The main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination in the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 32) in the special symbol game process as the special symbol variation pre-process. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the small winning time variable winning device management process.

[Change pattern selection table setting process at end of small hits]
FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a variation pattern selection table setting process at the time of a small hit end.

  Step S6620: The main control CPU 72 refers to the big hit post-change pattern selection counter value. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 refers to the big hit post-change pattern selection counter value stored in the flag counter area of the RAM 76. Note that the after-hit variation pattern selection counter value is updated (subtracted by 1) in step S4599 (FIG. 48) during the special symbol stop display process, and the updated after-hit variation pattern selection counter value is referred to. Is done. Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S6622.

  Step S6622: The main control CPU 72 refers to the switching variation number table. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 refers to a switching variation number table stored in the ROM 74 in advance. Here, the switching variation number table is a table for setting which variation pattern selection table to use based on the big hit after variation pattern selection counter value referred to in the previous process (step S6620). Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S6624.

  When the gaming state is a normal state (low probability non-time shortened state), the variation pattern selection table is fixed (variation pattern selection table N) regardless of the variation pattern selection counter value after the big hit (variation pattern selection table N). Since the state switching fluctuation number table is not defined, this process (step S6622) may be ignored. On the other hand, when the gaming state is the low probability time shortening state and the high probability time shortening state, different switching variation number tables A and B (FIGS. 51 and 52) are respectively defined. The corresponding switching variation number table is referred to according to the state.

  Step S6624: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the big hit post fluctuation pattern selection counter value is equal to the switching fluctuation number. Specifically, whether or not the big hit after fluctuation pattern selection counter value referred in the previous process (step S6620) is equal to the value of the switching fluctuation number specified in the table referred to in the previous process (step S6622). To check. As a result of the confirmation, if the big hit post-change pattern selection counter value is equal to the switching change number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S6626. On the other hand, if the after-hit variation pattern selection counter value is not equal to the switching variation number (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S6631. When the gaming state is the normal state (low probability non-time shortened state), the switching variation number table is not referred to in the previous process (step S6622), so the next step is not performed without comparing the values. S6631 may be executed.

  Step S6626: The main control CPU 72 sets a variation pattern selection table according to the switching variation number table. Specifically, the switching fluctuation number table (switching fluctuation number table A in the low probability time shortening state and switching fluctuation number table B in the high probability time shortening state) referred to according to the current gaming state and the big hit after fluctuation pattern Based on the selection counter value (the number of switching fluctuations), a fluctuation pattern selection table to be used is set.

  For example, when the gaming state is a low probability time shortening state and the variation pattern selection counter value after big hit is “95” or “80”, the variation pattern selection table to be used from now on is the variation pattern selection at the time of losing Table B, big hit variation pattern selection table A, and small hit variation pattern selection table B. Further, when the gaming state is a low probability time shortening state and the variation pattern selection counter value after big hit is “90” or “70”, the variation pattern selection table to be used from now on is the variation pattern selection at the time of loss Table A, big hit time fluctuation pattern selection table A, and small hit time fluctuation pattern selection table A.

  On the other hand, for example, if the gaming state is a state with a high probability time reduction and the after-hit variation pattern selection counter value is “9995” or “9988”, the variation pattern selection table to be used will vary depending on the time of loss. The pattern selection table E, the big hit variation pattern selection table D, and the small hit variation pattern selection table E. Further, when the gaming state is a state with a high probability time reduction and the after-hit variation pattern selection counter value is “9990” or “9970”, the variation pattern selection table to be used from now on is the variation pattern selection at the time of loss. Table D, big hit time fluctuation pattern selection table D, and small hit time fluctuation pattern selection table D.

  When the variation pattern selection table is set according to the switching variation number table, the main control CPU 72 returns to the small hit end processing (FIG. 64).

  Step S6631: The main control CPU 72 confirms the type of the small hit symbol at the time of the small hit. The small hit symbol represents a stop symbol (winning symbol) at the time of a small hit of a special symbol, and in this embodiment, five types are prepared, and it is confirmed which of the five types corresponds. . The five types are “small hit symbol A”, “small hit symbol B”, “small hit symbol C”, “small hit symbol D”, and “small hit symbol E”. Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S6633.

  Step S6633: The main control CPU 72 refers to the switching section confirmation table at the end of the small hits. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 refers to a small hit end end switching section confirmation table stored in the ROM 74 in advance. Here, the switching section confirmation table at the end of the small hits is a section in which the change of the variation pattern selection table of the special symbol is enabled and an invalid section corresponding to the number of changes after the end of the big hit game. It is a specified table. In addition, each section is defined corresponding to the stop symbol (winning symbol) at the time of the small hit confirmed in the previous process (step S6631). Therefore, it is possible to confirm whether or not the change pattern selection table can be changed based on the current number of changes and the small hit end end switching section check table. Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S6635.

FIG. 66 is a diagram illustrating an example of the small hitting end switching section confirmation table.
This small hit end switching section confirmation table stores, for example, “switching valid section / switching invalid section” and “whether or not change pattern selection table can be switched after small hitting end” in order from the top address. Structure. Here, the “switching valid section / switching invalid section” represents a section corresponding to the above-mentioned after-hit variation pattern selection counter value. In the section, it indicates whether or not the change pattern selection table can be switched (changed to another selection table) (◯) or not (×). The “switching valid section / switching invalid section” has different value sections depending on the gaming state at that time, and when the gaming state is in the low probability time shortening state, the first column from the left is referred to. In the case of the high probability time shortening state, the second column from the left is referred to. In addition, with regard to “whether or not the change pattern selection table can be switched after the end of a small hit”, whether or not switching (○ or ×) is different according to the stop symbol (winning symbol) at the time of a small hit, In the case of, the third column from the left is referred to. In the case of the small hit symbol B, the fourth column from the left is referred to. In the case of the small hit symbol C, the fifth column from the left is referred to. It will be. In the case of the small hit symbol D, the sixth column from the left is referred to, and in the case of the small hit symbol E, the seventh column from the left is referred to.

  For example, different values “100 to 96”, “95 to 91”, “90 to 88”, “87 to 85”, “84” are set in the “switching valid section / switching invalid section” of the “low probability time reduction state”. ˜81 ”,“ 80-71 ”,..., And“ switching valid section / switching invalid section ”in the“ high probability time shortening state ”have different values“ 10000 to 9996 ”,“ 9995 to 9991 ”. , “9990 to 9988”, “9987 to 9985”, “9984 to 9981”, “9988 to 9971”,..., “Small hit end” for each “switching valid section / switching invalid section” “Changeability of later change pattern selection table” is assigned.

  For example, for the switching valid section / switching invalid section “100 to 96” and “10000 to 9996”, in the small hit symbol A, the change pattern selection table can be switched at the end of the small hit, and other small hit symbols The same applies to B and the small hit symbol C. For the switching valid section / switching invalid section “95 to 91” and “9995 to 9991”, switching of the variation pattern selection table is not permitted at the end of the small hit in the small hit symbol A, and other small hit symbols Similarly, B and small hit symbol C are not recognized. For the switching valid section / switching invalid section “90 to 88” and “9990 to 9988”, switching of the variation pattern selection table is not permitted at the end of the small hit in the small hit symbol A, and other small hit symbols On the contrary, for B and small hit symbol C, switching is possible. For the switching valid section / switching invalid section “87 to 85” and “9987 to 9985”, switching of the variation pattern selection table is not permitted at the end of the small hitting symbol B, and other small hitting symbols are not allowed. On the contrary, A and small winning symbol C can be switched. For the switching valid section / switching invalid section "84 to 81" and "9984 to 9981", switching of the variation pattern selection table is not permitted at the end of the small hitting symbol C, and other small hitting symbols are not allowed. On the other hand, switching is possible for A and the small hit symbol B. For the switching valid section / switching invalid section “80 to 71” and “9988 to 9971”, switching of the variation pattern selection table is not permitted at the end of the small hit in the small hit symbol A, and other small hit symbols Similarly, B and small hit symbol C are not recognized.

  In addition, for example, in the small hit symbol D, switching of the variation pattern selection table is not permitted at the end of the small hit for all the sections. The change pattern selection table can be switched at the end.

  In this embodiment, five types of small hit symbols are defined, and five types are distributed in common between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but five types are assigned to the first special symbol. Of these, only three types may be employed, or only two types may be employed for the second special symbol. Moreover, although the possibility of switching of the variation pattern selection table is set to be the same in the low probability time reduction state and the high probability time reduction state, they may be set differently. Further, whether or not to switch the variation pattern selection table is set for each small hit symbol based on each segment (switching valid segment / switch invalid segment), but each segment may be set based on the small hit symbol. .

[Refer to Fig. 65: Variation pattern selection table setting process at end of small hits]
Step S6635: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the big hit post-change pattern selection counter value is included in the switching invalid section. Specifically, for the big hit post-change pattern selection counter value referenced in the previous process (step S6620), the small hit symbol confirmed in the previous process (step S6631) in the table referred to in the previous process (step S6633). It is confirmed whether the change pattern selection counter value after the big hit is included in the switching invalid section corresponding to. As a result of the confirmation, when the big hit post-change pattern selection counter value is included in the switching invalid section (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the small hit end processing (FIG. 64). On the other hand, when the big hit after fluctuation pattern selection counter value is not included in the switching invalid section (No), that is, when the big hit after fluctuation pattern selection counter value is included in the switching valid section, the main control CPU 72 Step S6700 is executed.

  Step S6700: The main control CPU 72 confirms each operation flag. Each operation flag to be confirmed here represents a variation time shortening function operation flag and a probability variation function operation flag. Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S6702.

  Step S6702: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the variable time shortening function activation flag is 1. This flag is set in the big hit other setting process (step S2414 in FIG. 33) during the previous special symbol fluctuation pre-process. As a result of this confirmation, when the variable time shortening function activation flag is 1 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S6704. On the other hand, when the variable time shortening function activation flag is not 1 (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S6710. In the present embodiment, the variable time shortening function operation flag is set to 1 after the end of all big hit games. However, in another embodiment, the variable time shortening function operation flag is set to 1 after the big hit game ends. If not set, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S6710.

  Step S6704: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the probability variation function operation flag is 1. This flag is also set in the big hit other setting process (step S2414 in FIG. 33) during the previous special symbol fluctuation pre-processing. If the result of this confirmation is that the probability variation function activation flag is 1 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5708. On the other hand, when the probability variation function operation flag is not 1 (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S6706.

  Step S6706: The main control CPU 72 sets the variation pattern selection table C. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the variation pattern selection table C at the time of loss, the variation pattern selection table A at the time of big hits, and the variation pattern selection table C at the time of small hits as variation pattern selection tables to be used from now on. Note that the big hit time variation pattern selection table A is set because the table is not changed based on the result corresponding to the small hit. Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S6712.

  Step S6708: The main control CPU 72 sets the variation pattern selection table F. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the variation pattern selection table F at the time of loss, the variation pattern selection table D at the time of big hits, and the variation pattern selection table F at the time of small hits as variation pattern selection tables to be used from now on. The big hit time variation pattern selection table D is set because the table is not changed based on the result corresponding to the big hit. Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S6712.

  Step S6710: The main control CPU 72 sets the variation pattern selection table N. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the fluctuation pattern selection table N at the time of loss, the fluctuation pattern selection table N at the time of big hits, and the fluctuation pattern selection table N at the time of small hits as fluctuation pattern selection tables to be used from now on. In the present embodiment, these variation pattern selection tables that are set are the same as before the small hit, and therefore this process need not be executed. As another embodiment, in addition to the fluctuation pattern selection table N (the fluctuation pattern selection table N at the time of loss, the fluctuation pattern selection table N at the time of big hit, the fluctuation pattern selection table N at the time of small hit), the fluctuation pattern selection table M (at the time of loss) When a variation pattern selection table M, a big hit variation pattern selection table M, and a small hit variation pattern selection table M) are defined, the variation pattern selection table M may be set as a variation pattern selection table to be used in the future. . Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S6712.

  Step S6712: The main control CPU 72 sets the after-hit variation pattern selection counter value to 20. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets 20 as the variation pattern selection counter value after small hits in the flag counter area of the RAM 76 and stores it. The variation pattern selection counter value after the small hit is decremented by 1 each time the variation display of the special symbol is completed in another process (step S4706: FIG. 49).

  When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the small hit end processing (FIG. 64).

[Example of switching the fluctuation pattern selection table]
FIG. 67 is a diagram illustrating an example of switching of the variation pattern selection table. Specifically, it is a diagram showing a variation pattern selection table used for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol after the end of the big hit game (after the completion of the conditional device operation) for each number of variations. It is assumed that the gaming state after the big hit game is set to a low probability time shortening state.

  For example, when the first variation display of the special symbol is started after the end of the big hit game, in the previous process (step S5706: FIG. 59), the “variation pattern selection table A” Table A, small variation pattern selection table A) ”is set. In addition, the post-hit variation pattern selection counter is set to “100”.

  Further, since the result of the first internal lottery of the special symbol is out of place, the variation pattern of the special symbol is selected from the “variation pattern selection table A at the time of loss”. Then, at the end of the first variation display of the special symbol (at the time of stop display), the variation pattern selection table to be used from now on is the “variation pattern selection table A” unchanged. Also, at the end of the first variation display of the special symbol (at the time of stop display), the after-hit variation pattern selection counter is updated to “99”.

  After that, since the result of the internal lottery was a small hit (small hit symbol A) at the start of the second variation display of the special symbol, the special symbol variation pattern is “small hit hour variation pattern selection table A”. It is selected from the inside. Then, at the end of the small hit game after the end of the second variation display of the special symbol, the variation pattern selection table to be used is changed from “variation pattern selection table A” to “variation pattern selection table C (fluctuation pattern at the time of loss”). The selection table C, the big hit time fluctuation pattern selection table A, and the small hit time fluctuation pattern selection table C) ”. Also, at the end of the second variation display of the special symbol (at the time of stop display), the after-hit variation pattern selection counter is updated to “98”.

  The change of the variation pattern selection table will be specifically described. If the variation pattern selection counter after the big hit is “98” and the type of the special symbol stop symbol (winning symbol) at the time of the small hit is the small hit symbol A, the switching section confirmation table at the end of the small hit (FIG. 66). ), The change pattern selection table can be changed (within the switching effective section). Therefore, at the end of the small hit game, the variation pattern selection table to be used is changed from “variation pattern selection table A” to “variation pattern selection table C”.

  At the start of the 3rd to 5th variation display of the special symbol, the result of the internal lottery was out of order, so the variation pattern of the special symbol is selected from the “variation pattern selection table C at the time of loss”. At the end of the 3rd and 4th variation display of the special symbol (during stop display), the variation pattern selection table to be used from now on is the “variation pattern selection table C” unchanged. Also, at the end of the third and fourth fluctuation display of the special symbol (at the time of stop display), the big hit after fluctuation pattern selection counter is updated to “97, 96”.

  On the other hand, at the end of the fifth variation display of the special symbol (during stop display), the variation pattern selection table to be used is changed from “variation pattern selection table C” to “variation pattern selection table B (fluctuation pattern variation table selection table). B, change pattern selection table A for big hits, change pattern selection table B) for small hits ”. This is because the big hit after fluctuation pattern selection counter is updated to “95” at the end of the fifth fluctuation display of the special symbol (during stop display), and the big hit after fluctuation pattern selection counter value is changed to the switching fluctuation number table A (FIG. 51) is the same value as the switching variation number (95) in FIG. 51, and is therefore based on the process of switching to the switching variation pattern selection table defined in the switching variation number table A (step S4726: FIG. 50).

  Thereafter, when the 6th to 10th variation display of the special symbol is started, the result of the internal lottery is out of order, and the variation pattern of the special symbol is selected from the “variation pattern selection table B at the time of loss”. At the end of the 6th to 9th variation display of the special symbol (during stop display), the variation pattern selection table to be used from now on is “variation pattern selection table B” unchanged. Also, at the end of the 6th to 9th variation display of the special symbol (during stop display), the after-hit variation pattern selection counter is updated to “94 to 90”.

  On the other hand, at the end of the 10th variation display of the special symbol (during stop display), the variation pattern selection table to be used is changed from “variation pattern selection table B” to “variation pattern selection table A (fluctuation pattern selection table at loss”). A, big hit time fluctuation pattern selection table A, small hit time fluctuation pattern selection table A) ”. At the end of the 10th fluctuation display of the special symbol (when stopped), the big hit after fluctuation pattern selection counter is updated to “89”, and the big hit after fluctuation pattern selection counter value is changed to the switching fluctuation number table A (FIG. 51), which is the same value as the switching variation number (90) in FIG. 51, this is due to the processing for switching to the switching variation pattern selection table defined in the switching variation number table A (step S4726: FIG. 50).

  Thereafter, at the start of the 11th to 14th fluctuation display of the special symbol, the result of the internal lottery was out of order, so the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is selected from the “fluctuation pattern selection table A at the time of loss”. Note that at the end of the 11th to 14th variation display of the special symbol (during stop display), the variation pattern selection table to be used from now on is the “variation pattern selection table A” unchanged. In addition, at the end of the 11th to 14th variation display of the special symbol (during stop display), the after-hit variation pattern selection counter is updated to “89 to 86”.

  After that, since the result of the internal lottery was a small hit (small hit symbol B) at the start of the fifteenth fluctuation display of the special symbol, the special symbol fluctuation pattern is “small hit hour fluctuation pattern selection table A”. It is selected from the inside. Then, at the end of the small hit game after the end of the fifteenth variation display of the special symbol, the variation pattern selection table to be used from now on is the “variation pattern selection table A” unchanged. Also, at the end of the fifteenth variation display of special symbols (during stop display), the after-hit variation pattern selection counter is updated to “85”.

  The fact that the change of the variation pattern selection table has not been executed will be specifically described. When the big hit variation pattern selection counter is “85” and the type of the special symbol stop symbol (winning symbol) at the small hit is the small hit symbol B, the small hit end switching section confirmation table (FIG. 66). ) Is not allowed to change the variation pattern selection table (switching invalid section). Therefore, at the end of the small hit game, the change of the variation pattern selection table to be used is not executed, and the “variation pattern selection table A” is not changed and is maintained.

  At the start of the 16th to 20th variation display of the special symbol, the result of the internal lottery is out of order, so that the variation pattern of the special symbol is selected from the “variation pattern selection table A at the time of loss”. Note that, at the end of the 16th to 19th variation display of the special symbol (during stop display), the variation pattern selection table to be used from now on is the “variation pattern selection table A” unchanged. Also, at the end of the 16th to 19th fluctuation display of the special symbol (at the time of stop display), the big hit after fluctuation pattern selection counter is updated to “84 to 81”.

  On the other hand, at the end of the twentieth variation display of the special symbol (during stop display), the variation pattern selection table to be used is changed from “variation pattern selection table A” to “variation pattern selection table B (fluctuation pattern variation table selection table). B, change pattern selection table A for big hits, change pattern selection table B) for small hits ”. At the end of the 20th fluctuation display of the special symbol (when stopped), the big hit after fluctuation pattern selection counter is updated to “80”, and the big hit after fluctuation pattern selection counter value is changed to the switching fluctuation number table A (FIG. 51) is the same value as the switching fluctuation number (80) in FIG. 51, and is therefore based on the process of switching to the switching fluctuation pattern selection table defined in the switching fluctuation number table A (step S4726: FIG. 50).

  At the start of the 21st variation display of the special symbol, the result of the internal lottery is off, so the variation pattern of the special symbol is selected from the “variation pattern selection table B at the time of loss”. Then, at the end of the 21st variation display of the special symbol (at the time of stop display), the variation pattern selection table to be used from now on is the “variation pattern selection table B” unchanged. At the end of the 21st variation display of the special symbol (during stop display), the after-hit variation pattern selection counter is updated to “79”.

  Thereafter, a variation pattern is selected using a variation pattern selection table set at the start of the variation display of the special symbol. In addition, at the end of the special symbol fluctuation display (stop display), the values of the fluctuation pattern selection counter after big hit and the fluctuation pattern selection counter after small hit are updated while changing with reference to the switching fluctuation number tables A and B. When the condition for switching the pattern selection table is satisfied, a process for switching to the specified one is performed.

  If the result of the internal lottery corresponds to a small hit, whether or not the change pattern selection table may be switched at the end of the small hit game corresponding to the type of stop symbol (winning symbol) at the time of the small hit It is confirmed based on the switching section confirmation table at the end of the small hit. If the result of the confirmation may be switched, a process for switching to the specified one is performed. If switching is not possible, the same variation pattern selection table as that at the time of variation at the small hit is maintained. Will be.

  In this way, switching to the variation pattern selection table C is triggered by the fact that it corresponds to a small hit, but switching from the variation pattern selection table C to another variation pattern is a big hit counted after the end of the special game. This is triggered by the fact that the value of the post-variation pattern selection counter has reached the specified value.

  In general, when it is desired to end the fluctuation by the fluctuation pattern selection table C corresponding to the small hit, the predetermined number of fluctuations must be reached, or the big hit or the small hit must be met. However, it takes a certain number of fluctuations to reach the specified number of fluctuations. In addition, being a big hit or a small hit is based on the result of an internal lottery, so it is not always convenient to win. For this reason, it is difficult to end the variation by the variation pattern selection table C corresponding to the small hit at an arbitrary timing.

  On the other hand, when the condition that the variation pattern selection counter after big hit counted after the end of the big hit game reaches the specified value is satisfied, the variation pattern selection table C is switched to another variation pattern selection table. The variation by the variation pattern selection table C can be terminated at random timing. In addition, by adopting such a variation pattern selection table switching method that has not been provided in the past, novel game characteristics can be exhibited.

  Further, in the present solution, when the condition that the after-hit variation pattern selection counter counted after the end of the big-hit game reaches a specified value is satisfied, the variation pattern before the after-hit variation pattern selection counter reaches the specified value. Since the selection table C is switched to another variation pattern selection table, the special section after the small hit game (the section in which the special variation is executed) can be made substantially variable (N times), and a new game Can be demonstrated.

  In addition, a switching invalid section or a switching valid section is provided for each small hit symbol, and even if a small hit game is executed, switching to the variation pattern selection table C corresponding to the small hit may not be executed. Thereby, when a special variation pattern is set to be selectable, even if a small hit game is executed, there is no switching to the variation pattern selection table C, so the selection with the special variation pattern is continued, It is possible to prevent a special performance corresponding to a special variation pattern from being interrupted in the middle, and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

[Game Flow]
FIG. 68 is a diagram for explaining a game flow developed in the pachinko machine 1.
When a game is started with the pachinko machine 1, the game is started from [F1] normal mode. In the “normal mode”, the winning probability of the special symbol is “low probability state”, and the winning probability of the normal symbol is “low probability state”. In this way, since the [F1] normal mode is in the “low probability non-time shortened state”, the first special symbol starts to change and the game is started by entering the game ball into the middle start winning opening 26. Progress.

  [F1] In the normal mode, if [F2] “10 round normal symbol” big hit hits, [F3] 10 round big hit game (challenge bonus) is executed, and [F4] challenge game of the big role production fails [F5] Shift to the escape mode.

  [F5] The escape mode is a low probability time shortening state. [F5] In the escape mode, if the winning result is not obtained and [F6] the special symbol changes 100 times, [F1] shifts to the normal mode.

  [F1] In normal mode, [F7] 10 round jackpot game (challenge bonus) or 16 rounds real 10 round jackpot game if it hits a jackpot of [F7] “10 round probability variation symbol” or “16 round probability variation symbol 1” (Challenge Bonus) is executed and [F8] succeeds in the challenge game produced by the big role.

  After the tenth round, [F9] treasure challenge effect is executed, but [F10] failure effect is executed and [F11] battle mode is entered. [F11] The battle mode is a high probability time shortening state.

  On the other hand, in the [F1] normal mode, when [F12] “16 round probability variation 2” is a big hit, [F3] 16 round big hit game (challenge bonus) is executed, [F8] a challenge game of the big role production To succeed.

  After the 10th round, [F9] treasure challenge production is executed, [F13] success production is executed, [F14] After 11th to 16th rounds, [F11] battle Enter mode.

Although not shown in particular, if it is a big hit of “16 round probability variation 3” in [F1] normal mode, [F5] escape mode, [F11] battle mode, 16 round big hit game (special festival bonus) It is executed and shifts to [F11] battle mode.
Note that the above game flow shows an example of a typical game flow, and does not cover all of the game flow.

[Example of production image]
Next, the effect image actually displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with some examples. As described above, when the big hit internal lottery is performed in the pachinko machine 1, the variation pattern (variation time) is determined under the control of the main control CPU 72, and the variation display by the first special symbol and the second special symbol is performed. (Design display means). However, as described above, the first special symbol and the second special symbol itself are lighted and blinked by 7-segment LEDs, so that they have poor appeal. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, the variable display effect using the effect symbol is performed as described above.

  The effect designs include, for example, a left effect symbol, a middle effect symbol, and a right effect symbol, which are displayed side by side on the left, middle, and right on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 (see FIG. 1). ). Each effect design is a design of a picture card with a character attached together with the numbers “1” to “9”, for example. Here, the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol all constitute a symbol row in which the numbers are arranged in descending order of “9” to “1”. Such a symbol sequence is variably displayed so as to flow (scroll) in the vertical direction in the left region, middle region, and right region on the screen.

  FIG. 69 is a continuous diagram showing examples of effect images corresponding to the change display and stop display of special symbols. Note that, here, an example of a change display effect and a stop display effect (result display effect) performed using the effect symbol is shown for the variation of the special symbol at the time of non-winning (losing). This variable display effect is performed between the start of the variable display of the special symbol (here, the first special symbol, but may be the second special symbol) and the stop display (including the fixed stop). It corresponds to a series of productions. Further, the stop display effect is an effect that represents that the special symbol is stopped and displayed and the result of the internal lottery at that time is a combination of the effect symbols. Here, before explaining the specific contents of the control processing, the basic flow of the change display effect and stop display effect for each change employed in the present embodiment will be described.

[Before change display]
69 (A): For example, in a state before the first special symbol starts to change (a state in which the demonstration effect is not being performed), a row of three effect symbols is displayed large on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. ing. At this time, in accordance with the stop display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the effect symbol is also stopped.

  In addition, on the lower part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, markers indicating the number of working memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol (reference numerals M1 and M2 are attached in the figure) are displayed. . These markers M1 and M2 indicate the number of operating memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol corresponding to the respective display numbers (the number of displays of the first special symbol operating memory lamp 34a and the second special symbol operating memory lamp 35a). The number of displays is increased or decreased in conjunction with the change in the number of working memories during the game. In addition, for the markers M1 and M2, the marker M1 corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed as, for example, a circle (◯) in order to facilitate visual discrimination, and the marker M2 corresponding to the second special symbol is, for example, a heart It is displayed with the shape. In the example of (A) in FIG. 69, all four markers M1 are lit to indicate that the number of working memories of the first special symbol is four, and all the markers M2 are not displayed (indicated by broken lines). This indicates that the number of working memories of the second special symbol is 0 (stored number display effect execution means).

  Further, during the variation display of the effect symbols, for example, the fourth symbol (reference numerals Z1 and Z2 are attached in the diagram) is displayed on the upper part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. The fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are “fourth effect symbols” following the left, middle, and right effect symbols, and are displayed in a synchronized manner during the change display of the effect symbols. Note that the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are simple marks (for example, “□” figure) with colors, and for example, changing the display color can express a variable display. The fourth symbol Z1 corresponds to the first special symbol, and the fourth symbol Z2 corresponds to the second special symbol.

  Further, the fourth symbols Z1, Z2 are stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, white display color) corresponding to the dislocation. This is to objectively clarify that the stop display effect is correctly performed and the pachinko machine 1 is operating normally. Therefore, if the result of the internal lottery is actually “10 round big hit” or “16 round big hit” instead of “out of”, the 4th pattern is displayed in a manner corresponding to them (for example, blue display color or red display color). Z1 and Z2 are stopped and displayed.

[Variable display production start]
69 (B): For example, in synchronization with the start of the change of the first special symbol, the change display effect is started by the scroll change of the three symbol rows on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 (the symbol effect). Execution means, production execution means). In other words, in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, the display of the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol is scrolled (flowed) in the vertical direction on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 so as to change the display. Production begins. In the figure, the effect symbol variation display is simply indicated by a downward arrow. Also, during the variable display, each effect symbol is displayed in a transparent state (transparent display), and at this time, an image (background image) that is the background of the effect symbol is displayed on the display screen in an easily visible state. Has been.

  The background image in this case represents, for example, a landscape in which a female character wearing a yukata is sitting on a chaise lounge and relaxing as if the evening is cool. Such a background image expresses that the stay mode in the production is, for example, “normal mode”. In the present embodiment, the “normal mode” corresponds to a normal state in which the fluctuation time shortening function is inactive and the probability fluctuation function is inactive. In addition to this, various modes are provided for effects, and background images with different landscapes and scenes are prepared for each mode (status display effect execution means). The difference between these modes may correspond to an internal “time reduction state” or a “high probability state”. The mode corresponding to each internal state will be further described later. Although not specifically illustrated here, a mode in which a notice effect is performed by displaying an image of a character, an item, or the like on the display screen after that is also possible.

  Further, during the variation display of the effect symbols, the fourth symbol Z1 is variably displayed at the upper part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and the fourth symbol Z1 expresses the variation display by changing the display color.

[Left design stop]
In FIG. 69 (C): For example, when a certain amount of time (about half of the fluctuation time) has elapsed, the left effect design first stops changing. In this example, the effect symbol representing the number “8” is stopped at the middle position of the screen. Here, illustration of the background image is omitted (the same applies to the following).

[Example of production when the number of working memories decreases]
Here, as shown in (B) of FIG. 69, since the number of working memories of the first special symbol decreases by one as the fluctuation starts, the number of markers M1 displayed is linked accordingly. It is reduced by one. For example, if there are four working memories so far, only the oldest (older) memory number display is hidden in the marker M1, and an effect consumed by the internal lottery is also performed. Thereby, it is possible to tell the player that the number of working memories for the first special symbol has decreased.

  In the example of (C) in FIG. 69, since the first operation memory in the storage order is consumed and the remaining number is three, the three markers M1 remaining on the screen are each one by one. An effect of shifting in the direction (here left direction) is performed. As a result, the context of the change in the number of working memories can be accurately expressed in the production, and the player can be intuitively and easily informed that the working memory has been consumed and decreased by one. it can.

[Right production symbol stop]
In FIG. 69 (D): Following the left effect symbol, the right effect symbol thereafter stops changing. In this example, the effect symbol representing the number “3” is stopped at the middle position of the screen. Since it has already been determined that the reach state does not occur at this point, it is almost clear on the appearance that the current fluctuation is a non-reach (normal) fluctuation. Here, reach fluctuations due to slip patterns and the like are excluded. “Slip pattern” means, for example, that once the design symbol representing the number “7” stops, the design symbol slips by one symbol and the design symbol representing the number “8” stops, thereby developing reach It is to do. Alternatively, once the design symbol representing the number “9” stops, the design symbol that represents the number “8” stops as the design sequence slips by one symbol in the opposite direction. is there. In addition, for example, when a production symbol representing a completely different number such as “5” is temporarily stopped and a character appears on the screen and the right production symbol row is changed again, the number “8” is represented. There is also a pattern in which the production design stops and develops to reach.

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 69 (E): The last medium effect symbol stops in synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol. If the result of the current internal lottery is non-winning and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a non-winning (out-of-game) manner, the staging display effect is also performed in a non-winning (out-of-game) manner. (Direction execution means). That is, in the illustrated example, the effect symbol representing the number “1” is stopped at the middle position of the screen. In this case, the combination of the effect symbols is “8”-“1”-“3”. Since this is a gap, it is expressed in the production that the current variation corresponds to the normal “out of range”. At this time, the fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, white display color) corresponding to the dislocation.

  The above is an example of the change display effect and the stop display effect (during non-winning) performed using the effect symbol for each change. Through such an effect, the player can have a sense of expectation for winning, and finally the result of the internal lottery can be clearly taught in the effect.

  In addition, the above example is for the case of non-winning, but at the time of big win (winning), after the reach effect is executed during the variable display effect, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in a big win mode in the stop display effect. At this time, the stop display mode of the effect symbol basically corresponds to the winning symbol (stop display mode of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35) selected internally by the main control CPU 72. Selected.

[Production example at the time of big hit]
FIG. 70 is a continuous diagram showing the flow of reach production executed at the time of a big hit (winning) in the case of corresponding to “10 round normal symbol”, “10 round probability variable symbol” or “16 round probability variable symbol 1, 2”. . Here, in addition to the reach effect, a variable display effect, a stop display effect, and a notice effect are included. In addition, an example of the notice effect (the notice effect before the occurrence of reach, the notice effect after the occurrence of reach) executed during the variable display effect will be described.

  In the following reach production, for example, after the first special symbol display device 34 performs the variation display by the variation pattern at the time of the big hit, the first special symbol is “10 round normal symbol”, “10 round probability variation symbol”, “16 Any aspect of the round probability variation pattern 1 or 2 (for example, 7-segment LED “self”, “yo”, “mouth”, “巳”, “F”, “E”, “L”, “Γ”, etc. ) Until it is stopped and displayed (reach effect execution means). In addition, in FIG. 70, each production | presentation symbol is simplified and shown only as the number. The markers M1 and M2 and the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are not shown here. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the flow of production.

[Variable display effects]
In FIG. 70, (A): For example, the lines of the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol are arranged in the vertical direction (for example, from the top) on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 substantially in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol The variable display effect is started by scrolling down.

[Preliminary production before reach (first stage)]
In FIG. 70 (B): Next, in a relatively early stage of the variable display effect, the first stage pre-reach notice effect using the character's picture image (picture card) is performed. This pre-reach pre-announcement effect is a pre-announcement effect in which the change of the mode progresses in stages from one stage to a plurality of stages (for example, 2 to 5 stages) according to a predetermined order. The pattern image used in the pre-reach notice effect is positioned in front of the effect symbol that is displayed on the screen in a variable manner, for example, so as to appear suddenly from the left edge of the screen (other appearance modes) May be.) Note that the “pre-reach notice” means that a reach or a big hit is announced before any effect symbol is stopped and displayed. By executing such a “pre-reach announcement effect”, an effect of giving the player a sense of expectation that “it may develop into a reach = the possibility of a big hit increases” is obtained.

[Advance notice before the reach occurs (second stage)]
(C) in FIG. 70: After the first stage of the pre-reach notice effect is executed, the change of the pre-reach notice effect proceeds to the second stage. Here, an effect using a character pattern image different from the previous one is performed as the notice effect before the occurrence of reach in the second stage. Specifically, another pattern image additionally appears from the right end of the screen, and is displayed so as to overlap the front of the previously displayed pattern image. The picture image displayed at this time is larger in size than the picture image displayed previously. And the effect by the sound output that the character expressed by the picture image emits a dialogue (for example, “I will reach” etc.) is also performed.

  Such a pre-reach notice announcement effect (second stage) using the second pattern image is one step further than the pre-reach notice effect (first stage) performed in FIG. 70 (B). It is a development type. In general, it may be expressed as “step-up notice” or the like, referring to the “pre-reach notice notice effect” that develops in this way. Here, an example is given in which the second-stage pattern image appears in the pre-reach notice effect, but the third-stage, fourth-stage, and fifth-stage pattern images appear and appear one after another. There may be. Further, for example, the size may be enlarged each time the third, fourth, and fifth-stage pattern images appear and appear one after another. Even at this stage, the variation display of the effect symbols is continued. In any case, it is possible to indicate to the player that there is a high possibility (expectation) that this change will be a big hit by making the change in the aspect of the pre-reach notice effect to more stages. (For example, the maximum expectation is suggested when progressing to the fifth stage).

[Stop of left design]
(D) in FIG. 70: The middle stage of the variable display effect is approached, and the variable display of the left effect symbol is stopped before long. At this point, the effect symbol representing the number “5” is stopped at the left position of the screen.

[Occurrence of reach condition]
In FIG. 70 (E): Subsequently to the left effect symbol, for example, the change display of the right effect symbol is stopped. At this point, the effect symbol representing the number “5” is stopped at the right position of the screen, so that a reach state of “5”-“being changed”-“5” has occurred. On the screen, an image that emphasizes one line that is in a reach state is also displayed. In addition, an effect of outputting a voice such as “Reach!” Is performed. In addition, in this case, if the number “5” is aligned, the expected degree of probability variation jackpot will be high (not the probability variation is confirmed). Can give players various tensions.

  After the reach state occurs, the reach production at the time of winning is executed (however, at this point in time, the winning result has not yet been expressed). In the reach effect, only the effect symbol corresponding to the tempered number (here, “5”) is displayed on the screen, and the others are not displayed. At this time, the effect symbols may be displayed in a reduced state at the four corners of the screen.

[Preliminary notice after reach occurs (first time)]
In FIG. 70, (F): After a reach state occurs, for example, an image representing a “heart” figure forms a group, and a post-reach notice effect (first time) is performed that passes diagonally on the screen. . In this case, the image of the “heart group” is suddenly displayed on the screen so that the visual appeal to the player can be enhanced. By executing such a notice effect after the visually lively reach occurs, the player can have an even greater expectation.

[Progress of super reach production (specific reach production execution means)]
In FIG. 70, (G): Following the announcement effect after the first reach, for example, images representing the numbers “2” to “6” are displayed in a three-dimensional column on the screen. There is an effect in which numerical images are erased from the screen in the order of “2”, “3”, “4”. Such an effect is also performed for the purpose of suggesting (impliciting) or reminding the player that the number “5” is left as it is without being erased. If the number “4” is erased and “5” remains in front of the screen, it means “big hit”, and if the number “5” is also erased, it means “out of place”. In the case of a loss, for example, the number “6” is displayed on the screen after the number “5” is deleted. Therefore, during this time, as the images are erased in order of the numbers “2”, “3”, and “4”, the player's tension and expectation also increase. Then, if the production progresses with the number “4” actually being erased on the screen and the number “5” remaining on the screen, the possibility of a “hit” increases, so the player feels nervous. Also increases at a stretch.

[Preliminary notice after the occurrence of reach (second time)]
In FIG. 70 (H): When the super reach production is approaching the end of the game, the content that the character image suddenly appears on the screen as if it was split into a close-up and the character emits some dialogue (or silent (This may be a content of smiling at the event). At this time, for example, the content of the reach effect is a development that “if the number“ 5 ”remains without being erased, the possibility of a big hit of“ 5 ”-“ 5 ”-“ 5 ”increases” as it is ”. Therefore, by causing a character image to appear greatly at this timing, an effect of giving the player a sense of expectation that “may be a big hit” is obtained.

  As a reach production different from the above, for example, if “numbers“ 2 ”to“ 4 ”are erased and the number“ 5 ”is left unerased at the end,“ 5 ”-“ 5 ”- There is also a development that “5 is a big hit with a design with a high probability of probability change”. When the character image appears at such a timing, an effect can be obtained in which the player has a sense of expectation that “the probability big hit is likely to be near”.

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 70 (I): For example, the last medium effect symbol stops substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol. In this example, the winning symbol internally corresponds to one of “10 round normal symbol”, “10 round probability variable symbol”, “16 round probability variable symbol 1, 2”, but the type of winning symbol is not For example, an effect that tells the player that this time corresponds to either “a normal big hit or a probable big hit” this time by stopping and displaying an effect symbol representing “5” in the center of the screen while making the disclosure. Has been done.

  In FIG. 70 (J): For example, the stop display effect is also displayed for the stop display effect as the effect symbol substantially in synchronization with the fixed stop display of the first special symbol. The stop display effect of the effect symbol is performed, for example, in a state where the left, middle and right effect symbols are restored to their initial sizes. By performing such a stop display effect, the player can be informed that the final winning type has been confirmed on the effect. Conversely, by performing an unclear stop display effect on the effect, “whether it is a promising big hit or a normal (non-probable big hit)” can be made undisclosed to the player. .

  In the case of “10 round normal symbol”, “10 round probability variable symbol”, and “16 round probability variable symbol 1, 2”, the winning type will not be disclosed after the end of the big hit game, but “16 round probability variable symbol 3” In the case of, the following production techniques can be adopted. In other words, when “16 round probability variation 3” is internally applied, an even number of production symbols are stopped and displayed, and “7” production symbols are stopped and displayed due to another change (for example, a re-lottery production). There is an effect of promoting to “probable change”, or in the stop display effect, even-numbered effect symbols are stopped and displayed and promoted to “probability” in the effect during the big hit game.

  Further, if the result of the internal lottery is not won, the first special symbol that is the current variation target is stopped and displayed as the off symbol, so that the staging display effect is similarly performed in a manner of deviation. In this case, by displaying the numbers “4” and “6” other than “5” in the center of the screen, unfortunately, an effect is provided informing that the current change did not result in a big hit. Such an effect is executed as an “out of reach reach effect”.

[Examples of directing directors (challenge bonus and treasure challenge)]
FIGS. 71 to 81 are partial examples of the production of the big role effect that is executed when any of “10 round normal symbol”, “10 round probability variable symbol”, and “16 round probability variable symbol 1, 2” is applied. FIG.

  In this embodiment, when it corresponds to the “10 round normal symbol”, an effect that fails in the challenge game is executed in the big role production (challenge bonus), and “10 round probability variation symbol”, “16 round probability variation symbol 1”. , 2 ”, a successful presentation in the challenge game is executed. Hereinafter, the flow of production will be described in order.

[Opening production]
In FIG. 71, (A): When the opening of the big hit game is started, for example, character information such as “challenge bonus” is displayed in the screen. As a result, the player can be instructed of the type of the big role production to be performed.

  In addition, an effect symbol corresponding to the current winning symbol (here, “5” effect symbol) is displayed at the lower right corner of the screen. Thus, by continuously displaying the winning symbol (so-called “remaining eye”) even during the big hit game, it is possible to continuously instruct the player of the information “winning with the five effect symbols”. Note that the same effect is also executed after the first round of the jackpot game.

[Round 1]
In FIG. 71, (B): When the first round of the big hit game is started, for example, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of “ROUND1” is displayed on the screen, and an effect of being a big player is started. For example, a female character appears, character information such as “Challenge game starts!” Is displayed, and an effect of generating a dialogue is executed, and explanation in the challenge bonus is started. Accordingly, it is possible to teach the player that the challenge game is started during the challenge bonus.

[2nd round]
In FIG. 71 (C): When the second round of the jackpot game is started, the explanation during the challenge bonus is continued. Specifically, text information such as “If you succeed in the challenge game, you will enter a wonderful mode!” Is displayed, and an effect of emitting a female character dialogue is executed. Thereby, it can be taught to the player that when the challenge game is successful, the mode is shifted to the battle mode representing the high probability time reduced state after the big hit game is finished.

[3rd round]
In FIG. 72 (D): When the third round of the jackpot game is started, the explanation during the challenge bonus is continued. Specifically, text information such as “Please hit the button repeatedly to drop the above character!” And the effect of emitting the female character dialogue is executed. Thereby, it can be instructed to the player that the fall of the movable body 40f, which is a success condition of the challenge game, requires the effect switching button 45 to be repeatedly hit.

[Round 4]
In FIG. 72 (E): When the fourth round of the jackpot game is started, an effect related to the challenge game is started. In this example, an effect switching button 45 and a meter divided into twelve parts extending from the effect switching button 45 to the position of the movable body 40f at the top of the screen are displayed, and an effect requesting the pressing of the effect switching button 45 is executed. The In addition, character information such as WIN is displayed at the top of the meter. Thereby, it can be taught to the player that the effect switching button 45 is continuously hit and the meters are filled one by one, and the movable body 40f falls when reaching the WIN.

[5th round]
In FIG. 72 (F): The fifth round of the jackpot game has started, the challenge game has progressed smoothly, and when the player repeatedly hits the effect switching button 45 in the challenge game, the number of meters has reached about eight. It is shown.

[If it falls under “10 rounds of regular symbols”]
[6th round]
In FIG. 73, (G): When the sixth round of the big hit game is started and the winning type is “10 round normal symbol”, the meter is set to 12 even though the player repeatedly hits the effect switching button 45. It is shown that all of them could not be filled and WIN was not reached. In this example, character information such as “LOSE” is displayed on the front surface of the meter. As a result, the player can be informed that the chance game has failed.

[Round 7]
In FIG. 73 (H): When the seventh round of the jackpot game is started, a female character appears, and text information such as “Enter the escape mode after the bonus!” Is done. Thereby, it can be taught to the player that the game state after the big hit game is shifted to the escape mode of the low probability time shortened state.

[Eighth round]
In FIG. 73, (I): When the eighth round of the jackpot game is started, character information such as “If you run away from the evil army during the escape mode, the jackpot!” Is displayed, and the female character utters words. Production is performed. Thereby, the game nature in escape mode can be explained to a player.

[9th round]
In FIG. 74 (J): When the 9th round of the jackpot game is started, character information such as “Be careful when you get caught by an evil army! Production is performed.

[10th round]
In FIG. 74 (K): When the 10th round of the jackpot game is started, the text information such as “Maybe the ally may help even if caught!” And the effect that the female character speaks is executed. The

[At the end of a major role]
In FIG. 74 (L): At the timing when the big hit game ends (during the end processing), the big end effect of the content teaching the internal state to be transferred thereafter is executed. In the example shown in the figure, character information “Escape mode rush!” Is displayed on the screen. By executing such a big game end effect, the player can be instructed to shift to the “low probability time shortened state” escape mode as a bonus after the big hit game ends.

[If it falls under “10-round probability variation symbol”, “16-round probability variation symbol 1, 2”]
[6th round]
FIG. 75 (G): On the other hand, in the case of winning with either “10-round probability variation symbol” or “16-round probability variation symbol 1, 2”, a successful presentation is executed in the sixth round. Specifically, it is shown that when the player repeatedly hits the effect switching button 45, all 12 meters are filled and WIN is reached.

  (H) in FIG. 75: Then, the effect that the movable body 40f falls on the front surface of the display screen is executed. Thereby, it can be taught to the player that the movable body 40f has been successfully dropped.

[Round 7]
In FIG. 75 (I): In the case of winning with either “10-round probability variation symbol” or “16-round probability variation symbol 1, 2”, a blessing effect is executed in the seventh round. Specifically, a hermit character is displayed on the left side of the screen, and an effect of producing the line “I did it well!” Is executed. As a result, the player can be satisfied that the challenge game is successful.

[10th round]
In FIG. 75 (J): In the case of winning with either “10-round probability variation symbol” or “16-round probability variation symbol 1, 2”, the blessing effect starting from the seventh round is continued until the tenth round. In the example shown in the figure, an effect is performed in which a female character performing a peace sign emits the line “I did it!”.

[Treasure challenge production]
In FIG. 76 (K): In the case of winning with either “10-round probability variation symbol” or “16-round probability variation symbol 1, 2”, a treasure challenge effect is executed after 10 rounds have ended. In the treasure challenge production, the horse character pulls the treasure, and if the treasure can be attracted, six substantial jackpot rounds are added. The treasure challenge production is executed at the end time after the 10th round is completed in the case of winning with the “10th round probability variation symbol”, and in the case of “16th round probability variation symbol 1, 2” the tenth round. And the interval time between the 11th round.

[Game description production]
In FIG. 76 (L): When the treasure challenge effect is started, a game explanation effect is first executed. In the example shown in the figure, a hermit character is displayed on the right side of the screen, and an effect is produced in which the hermit character utters the line “If you draw a treasure, add a round!”.

  In FIG. 76 (M): When the game explanation effect ends, an item provision effect in which the female character provides an item is executed. Specifically, an effect in which a female character straddling a horse takes out an item (food) is executed.

  In FIG. 76 (N): Then, an effect is performed in which the horse character eats the food provided by the female character. At this time, for example, depending on the type of item to be provided, the reliability of success or failure in the treasure challenge effect can be varied.

  In FIG. 77, (O): The screen is switched, the sharp eyes of the horse character are displayed, and the characters “Ready” are displayed at the top of the screen.

  In FIG. 77 (P): The characters “GO!” Are displayed at the top of the screen, and it is instructed that the directing effect of the effect switching button 45 has been started. In addition, a button image in which the effect switching button 45 is simplified is displayed in the lower left area of the display screen, and an effect that prompts the player to press the effect switching button 45 is performed. Around the button image, a time meter indicating the lapse of the button effective time is displayed so as to surround the button image, and here, one square corresponds to about 1 second. In the example shown in the figure, all the eight square time meters are displayed as colored images, so that the press of the effect switching button 45 is effective for about 8 seconds from now on. Each square of the time meter decreases by one square every time 1 second elapses.

  In FIG. 77 (Q): It is assumed that the player has started striking the effect switching button 45 in response to an effect prompting the player to press the effect switching button 45. Then, the horse character begins to step on the foot in response to repeated hitting of the effect switching button 45, and the effect of gradually moving to the left is executed. At this time, since the remaining squares of the time meter are 6 squares, the player can be informed that the remaining effective time of the effect switching button 45 is about 6 seconds.

  In FIG. 78 (R): The player continues to hit the effect switching button 45 continuously. In the illustrated example, the horse character has reached the vicinity of the center. At this time, since the remaining squares of the time meter are four squares, the player can be informed that the remaining effective time of the effect switching button 45 is about four seconds.

  In FIG. 78 (S): The player continues to hit the effect switching button 45 continuously. In the illustrated example, the horse character has reached the left end of the screen. At this time, since the remaining squares of the time meter are two squares, the player can be informed that the remaining effective time of the effect switching button 45 is about two seconds.

  In FIG. 78 (T): When the repetitive striking effect of the effect switching button 45 has reached the final stage, a cut-in notice effect is displayed that is suddenly displayed on the screen so that the character image is split into a large image. . In the example shown in the figure, a female character is displayed in an area cut diagonally on the screen, and a scene in which the female character is praying with both hands together is displayed. At this time, since the time meter has one remaining cell, the player can be informed that the remaining effective time of the effect switching button 45 is about one second.

[16 rounds probable variation 2 wins]]
In FIG. 79 (U): In the case of winning with “16 round probability variation 2”, a successful production in the treasure challenge production is executed. Specifically, an effect is performed in which the treasure tied to the tip of the string pulled by the horse character pops out vigorously.

  In FIG. 79 (V): A character “success” is displayed at the top of the screen, and an effect is produced in which the hermit character utters the line “Fantastic!”. Such a successful effect corresponds to “16-round probability variation 2”, and a predetermined random number lottery (for example, 1/10) executed when the button is pressed once within the button effective time. When winning in the random number lottery to be won), it is executed when the button is pressed more than a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times) within the button effective time or when the button effective time elapses.

[Eleventh round]
79 (W): When the interval time between the 10th and 11th rounds ends, the 11th round starts. The eleventh and subsequent rounds are positioned as special rounds, and character information of “special round” is displayed at the bottom of the screen, and a female character unique to the special round is displayed.

[12th round]
In FIG. 80 (X): Special round effects are continued in the 12th round as well. In the illustrated example, a female character unique to the special round is displayed.

[16th round]
In FIG. 80 (Y): After that, when the big hit game progresses smoothly and moves to the final 16 rounds, the character information corresponding to the number of rounds of “ROUND16” is displayed on the screen, and the special round A unique effect image is displayed.

[At the end of a major role]
In FIG. 80 (Z): At the timing when the big hit game is finished, the big end ending effect of the contents teaching the internal state to be transferred thereafter is executed. In the example shown in the drawing, the text information “Battle mode entry!” Is displayed on the screen. By executing such a big game end effect, the player can be instructed to shift to the battle mode of “high probability time reduction state” as a privilege after the big hit game ends.

[10-round probability variation or 16-round probability variation symbol 1 win]
81 (a): On the other hand, in the case of winning with either “10-round probability variation symbol” or “16-round probability variation symbol 1”, a failure rendering in the treasure challenge effect is executed. Specifically, an effect is performed in which a string pulled by a horse character breaks in the middle.

  In FIG. 81 (b): The character “failure” is displayed in the upper part of the screen, and the effect that the character of the hermit emits the line “sorry” is executed. Such failure production is executed by using a part of the end time in the case of winning with “10th round probability variation symbol”, and from the 11th round in the case of winning with “16th round probability variation symbol 1”. It is executed using the fast opening time up to the 16th round. In addition, in the 11th to 16th rounds when winning with “16 round probability variation 1”, the second variable winning device 31 is opened 4 times, but the opening time is set extremely short, so The profit by is hardly obtained.

[At the end of a major role]
In FIG. 81, (c): At the timing when the big hit game is finished, the big end ending effect of the content teaching the internal state to be transferred thereafter is executed. In the example shown in the drawing, the text information “Battle mode entry!” Is displayed on the screen. By executing such a big game end effect, the player can be instructed to shift to the battle mode of “high probability time reduction state” as a privilege after the big hit game ends.

[Example of battle mode production]
FIG. 82 is a continuous diagram showing an example of an effect in the battle mode. This battle mode is a mode that is shifted to after the big hit game in the case where one of the “10 round probability variation symbols” or “16 round probability variation symbols 1, 2, 3” corresponds to the big hit. The battle mode is a high probability time reduction state. Hereinafter, the flow of production will be described in order.

  FIG. 82 (A): For example, by performing the first variation display after the end of the big hit game, the variation display of the effect symbols is performed in the “battle mode” state. The background image of the battle mode is a background image that expresses "a scene where fireworks are launched in the night sky" and "a female character watching fireworks" in order to deeply impress the player with a firework motif It has become. Further, the fourth symbol Z1 is variably displayed at the upper part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42.

  In FIG. 82 (B): Since the first fluctuation after the end of the big hit game (during non-winning) has ended, all effect symbols are stopped and displayed ("3"-"1"-"7 "). Further, the fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a non-winning manner (for example, white display color).

  (C) in FIG. 82: When the next variation is started, the second variation display is performed after the end of the big hit game. In the illustrated example, the variation display of the effect symbol accompanying the variation display of the first special symbol is shown. However, in the high probability time shortening state, the variable start winning device 28 is operated at a high frequency. As long as the player continues to make a right turn, the variation display of the second and subsequent times after the end of the big hit game is often performed with the variation display of the effect symbol accompanying the variation display of the second special symbol.

FIG. 83 to FIG. 86 are continuous diagrams showing examples of effects executed when winning or losing in the battle mode.
The following effects are examples of effects that are executed when a big hit is made in the battle mode or when a loss reach effect is selected. Hereinafter, the flow of production will be described in order.

  In FIG. 83 (A): the effect symbol is displayed in the “battle mode” state. In the example shown in the drawing, a background image expressing “a scene where a female character is watching fireworks” is displayed together with “a scene where fireworks are launched in the night sky”. In addition, a fourth symbol Z1 corresponding to the first special symbol and a fourth symbol Z2 corresponding to the second special symbol are displayed on the upper right of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. Here, the fourth symbol Z2 varies. It is displayed.

  In FIG. 83 (B): For example, an effect is performed in which a female character utters the line “Game! By executing such an effect, it is possible to give the player an impression that “something will begin in the future”. In addition, from this point of time, in order to display the effect of making the ally character and the enemy character play against each other on the screen, the effect display effect is executed in a state where the effect symbol is reduced at the upper left corner position of the screen (“2”). -"Fluctuating"-"Fluctuating").

  83C: For example, a panda character (enemy character) appears on the left side of the screen, a female character (friend character) appears on the right side of the screen, and an image of the character “VS” appears in the center of the screen. Production to be performed. Thereby, it can be taught to the player that a battle reach effect will be started. It should be noted that a reach state has occurred in the effect symbol that is variably displayed at the upper left of the screen ("2"-"fluctuating"-"2").

  In FIG. 84 (D): After that, the battle reach effect is specifically advanced. In the example shown in the figure, an effect is performed in which the panda character moves toward the female character. Then, there will be a performance in which the female character runs away with surprise and disappears to the right side of the screen.

  In FIG. 84 (E): This time, a female character takes out a drum (weapon), and an effect in which a flame (aura) appears from the drum is performed. In this effect example, an effect of fighting an enemy character using a drum is executed, but an effect of fighting an enemy character using a fan, for example, can also be executed. Thus, the expectation degree of jackpot can be changed by changing the weapon used for a battle.

  FIG. 84 (F): Then, an effect is performed in which the female character turns the drum toward the panda character.

  (G) in FIG. 85: Following this, an effect in which a wave is emitted from the drum is executed. If you can defeat the panda character in this state, it will be a big hit.

[When disconnected]
In FIG. 85 (H): When the variation of the special symbol this time corresponds to non-winning, an effect is performed in which the panda character successfully avoids the wave fired from the drum.

  In FIG. 85, (I): When the panda character is displayed in a large size and the female character is displayed in a small size together with the characters “defeated...”, It is transmitted to the player that the player is not selected. Then, at the upper left corner position of the screen, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in a state where the effect symbol is reduced ("2"-"3"-"2").

  In FIG. 85 (J): In this case, a stop display effect as an effect symbol is performed in synchronization with the special symbol stop display. The stop display effect of the effect symbol is performed, for example, in a state where the left, middle and right effect symbols are restored to their initial sizes. Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is stopped and displayed in a non-winning manner (for example, white display color).

  After this, since the battle mode is continued, the player aims for the next big hit during the battle mode.

[When winning]
In FIG. 85 (K): On the other hand, if this special symbol variation hits a big hit, the panda character will wave, causing an explosion and causing the panda character to fly far away. Executed.

  In FIG. 85 (L): When the female character is displayed large together with the characters “Victory!” And the panda character is displayed small, it is transmitted to the player that it is a big hit (winning). At the upper left corner of the screen, the stop display effect is executed with the effect symbol reduced (“2”-“2”-“2”). However, all of the three production symbols are displayed swinging from side to side, and the variation of the production symbols is not completely stopped.

  In FIG. 85 (M): The effect symbols are returned to the state where the left, middle, and right effect symbols are restored to their initial sizes. However, all of the three production symbols are displayed swinging from side to side, and the variation of the production symbols is not completely stopped. At this time, the special symbol is in a changing state, and the fourth symbol Z2 is also in a changing state.

[Promotion opportunity promotion]
86 (N): When there are three production symbols, the big hit is decided there, but it determines the size of the profit (out) that is obtained in the big hit game (determines the number of rounds) Promotion chance production is executed.
In the example shown in the drawing, the character information “promotion chance” is displayed on the upper part of the screen. As a result, the player can be given a sense of expectation that the promotion chance effect will be started from now, and the player may be promoted from “2 effect design” to “7 effect design”.

  In FIG. 86, (O): The three-staged effect symbols are displayed gradually smaller, and the three-lined effect symbols are drawn into the back side of the screen while rotating.

  86 (P): The three effect symbols become so small that they are hardly visible. At that time, the image of the effect switch button 45 is displayed at the bottom of the display screen, and the player presses the press of the effect switch button 45. An effect is urged.

[Promotion chance failure production]
86 (Q): If the promotion chance effect fails, that is, if it falls under either “10-round probability variation symbol” or “16-round probability variation symbol 1, 2”, the promotion chance failure rendering is Executed. In this case, when the effect switching button 45 is pressed, an effect that the effect symbol pops out from the back side to the near side is executed, and the effect symbol is enlarged and displayed so that not all of the three effect symbols can be displayed. In this case, however, the number of the production symbol is not changed (it remains “2”).

  86 (R): The stop display effect is also performed for the effect symbol substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the special symbol. The stop display effect of the effect symbol is performed in a state where the effect symbol is completely stopped without shaking. The fourth symbol Z2 is actually stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, green display color) corresponding to the “10-round probability variation symbol” or “16-round probability variation symbol 1, 2”. After that, the above-described challenge bonus effect (acting during big role) is executed on the screen.

[Promotion of successful promotion]
86 (S): On the other hand, if the promotion chance effect is successful, that is, if it corresponds to “16 round probability variation 3”, the promotion chance success effect is executed. In this case, when the effect switching button 45 is pressed, an effect that the effect symbol pops out from the back side to the near side is executed, and the effect symbol is enlarged and displayed so that not all of the three effect symbols can be displayed. The number of the production symbol is changed from “2” to “7”.

  86 (T): The stop display effect is also performed for the effect symbol substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the special symbol. The stop display effect of the effect symbol is performed in a state where the effect symbol is completely stopped without shaking. The fourth symbol Z2 is actually stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, orange display color) corresponding to the “16-round probability variable symbol 3”. After that, a special festival bonus effect (acting during the big role) is executed on the screen that is a big hit of 16 rounds.

[Director-in-chief production (normal special festival bonus production)]
FIG. 87 is a continuous diagram partially showing an example of a big-bill effect performed during a big hit game when “16 round probability variation 3” is applicable. This big role production is executed, for example, when a success production is executed in the above promotion chance production.

[1 round]
87 (A): When the first round of the big hit game is started, the big role effect of the content corresponding to the progress status of the game, “big hit” is executed. In the role-playing effect, for example, character information corresponding to the number of rounds “ROUND1” is displayed on the screen. In addition, an effect symbol corresponding to the current winning symbol (here, the number “7”) is displayed at the lower right corner of the screen. Thus, by continuously displaying the winning symbol (so-called “remaining eye”) even during the big hit game, it is possible to continuously instruct the player of the information “winning with the seven effect symbols”. In addition, characters of “Special Festival Bonus” are displayed in the lower left area of the display screen, and images about festivals such as “Uchiwa” and “Taiko” are displayed around the screen.

[16 rounds]
In FIG. 87 (B): After that, when the big hit game progresses smoothly and moves to the final 16 rounds, the character information corresponding to the number of rounds of “ROUND16” is displayed on the screen, and the big hit game is being played. A unique effect image is displayed. Further, the effect symbol (the number “7”) as the “remaining eye” is continuously displayed at the lower right corner position of the screen.

[At the end of a major role]
In FIG. 87 (C): At the timing when the big hit game is ended, the big end ending effect of the content teaching the internal state to be transferred thereafter is executed. In this example, for example, the text information “Battle mode rush!” Is displayed on the screen. By executing such a big game end effect, the player can be instructed to shift to the battle mode in the high probability time shortened state as a privilege after the big hit game ends.

[Example of runaway mode]
88 to 94 are continuous diagrams showing examples of effects in the escape mode. This escape mode is a mode that is shifted to after the end of the big hit game in the case of “10 round normal symbol”. The escape mode is a “low probability time reduction state”. Hereinafter, the flow of production will be described in order.

  88 (A): For example, after the big hit game in “10 round normal symbol” is finished, the first variation display is performed, so that the variation display of the effect symbol is performed in the “runaway mode” state. Yes. The background image of the escape mode is a background image with the motif of images such as "sand beach", "sea", and "mountain" to express the impression that the female character, which is the concept of the escape mode, escapes from the evil army. It has become. Further, the fourth symbol Z1 is variably displayed at the upper part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42.

  (B) in FIG. 88: All effect symbols are stopped and displayed ("3"-"1"-"7") due to the end of the current fluctuation (when not winning). Further, the fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a non-winning manner (for example, white display color).

  (C) in FIG. 88: The next fluctuation is started. This escape mode ends when the special symbol changes 100 times without obtaining the winning result. When the escape mode ends, the normal mode with a low probability non-time reduction state is entered. If a winning result is obtained in the escape mode, a reach effect is executed and a big hit is achieved.

  Here, at the end of the big hit game, the variation pattern selection table A is set as a selection table used when selecting the variation pattern. Specifically, the variation pattern selection table A at the time of loss, the variation pattern selection table at the time of the big hit A, small hit variation pattern selection table A is set. Among these, the deviation variation pattern selection table A and the small hit variation pattern selection table A are defined as selection tables in which the reach effect is more easily selected than usual, as described above. Therefore, in the escape mode (low probability time shortening state), the reach effect is more easily selected than usual.

  In FIG. 89 (D): It is assumed that the escape mode has proceeded smoothly and the small hit variation has started. Further, it is assumed that a variation pattern for which the reach effect of the variation pattern selection table A for small hits is executed is selected as the variation pattern. The fourth symbol Z2 is variably displayed at the upper part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42.

  In FIG. 89, (E): Fluctuation at the time of a small hit is started, and the effect symbol is variably displayed in the reach state on the upper part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 (“2” — “being changed” — “2”). Further, in this example, an evil corps UFO appears, and an effect is performed in which a female character who escapes on a ship is discovered.

  In FIG. 89, (F): Reach production has progressed, and the UFO of the evil army chases the female character while saying “Mate”, and the female character is performing the production noticed by the UFO. Therefore, in this reach production, if the female character escapes from the evil army safely, it represents a big hit.

  In FIG. 90 (G): Reach production has further progressed, and while the female character UFO has escaped, the production of the line “Run away” has been executed.

  In FIG. 90 (H): An effect is performed in which the enemy character jumps out of the UFO toward the female character and utters “Noritsure!”.

  90 (I): The variation display at the time of the small hit is finished, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 ("2"-"3"-"2"), and the fourth symbol Z2 is stopped and displayed in a small hitting manner (for example, yellow display color). In this example, an effect is performed in which a female character is caught by an enemy character, the enemy character utters “Kanen Shiro!”, And the female character utters “Caught ...”.

  Here, at the end of the small hit game, the selection table used when selecting the variation pattern is changed from the variation pattern selection table A to the variation pattern selection table C. Specifically, the variation pattern selection table C at the time of disconnection, A big hit hour variation pattern selection table A and a small hit hour variation pattern selection table C are set. Among these, the deviation variation pattern selection table C and the small hit variation pattern selection table C are defined as selection tables in which the reach effect is less likely to be selected than usual, as described above. In addition, the game mode is changed from the escape mode to the prison mode, and in the prison mode (low probability time shortened state), it represents a game mode in which the reach effect is less likely to be selected than usual.

  (J) in FIG. 91: The next fluctuation is started. This prison mode ends when the winning symbol is not obtained and the special symbol fluctuates 20 times. When the prison mode ends, the game mode changes to the game mode at that time. For example, in the low probability time shortening state, the mode shifts to the escape mode, and in the low probability non-time shortened state, the mode shifts to the normal mode. In addition, when a winning result is obtained in the prison mode, a reach effect is executed and it is a big hit.

  91 (K): Since the variation pattern in the prison mode is defined as a selection table in which the reach effect is less likely to be selected than usual, the variation display at the time of losing is completed in a short time. In this example, the effect symbols are stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 (“6” − “3” − “2”).

  91 (L): Then, the next variation is started, the variation time of the selected variation pattern is completed, and the effect symbol is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 (“9”-“ 3 "-" 2 ").

  Here, the selection table used when selecting the variation pattern at the end of the variation display of the special symbol at the time of deviation after the predetermined variation number of times (stop display) is selected from the variation pattern selection table C. Specifically, the change pattern selection table B at the time of loss, the fluctuation pattern selection table A at the time of big hit, and the fluctuation pattern selection table B at the time of small hit are set. The change setting of the fluctuation pattern selection table assumes that the number of switching fluctuations defined in the switching fluctuation number table A is equal to the big hit after fluctuation pattern selection counter value counted after the big hit game ends. The switching variation pattern selection table associated with the number of switching variations is based on the variation pattern selection table B. Note that, as described above, only one variation pattern (a variation pattern in which the reach effect is not executed) is defined in the loss variation pattern selection table B and the small hit variation pattern selection table B. Therefore, the change display of the special symbol over the same predetermined change time is performed until the change pattern selection table B is switched to another change pattern selection table.

  In FIG. 92 (M): The next fluctuation is started. Since the variation display of the special symbol in the variation pattern selection table B is performed over a predetermined variation time, a specific effect is executed. In this example, a specific performance in which a goddess character appears is executed.

  In FIG. 92 (N): Since the current variation (during non-winning) has been completed, all effect symbols are stopped and displayed ("5"-"2"-"6"). Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is stopped and displayed in a non-winning manner (for example, white display color). In this example, a specific performance is performed in which the character of the goddess casts a spell on the enemy character and utters the words “Sleep”.

  92 (O): The next variation starts, the variation time of the variation pattern selected from the variation pattern selection table B ends, and the effect design is stopped and displayed on the upper part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. ("1"-"2"-"5"). In this example, a specific performance is executed in which the enemy character sleeps and the goddess character utters “Escape early”.

  Here, it is assumed that the result of the current internal lottery corresponds to the small hit (small hit symbol B) (the fourth symbol Z2 is stopped in the small hit mode). In the present embodiment, at the end of the small hit, there is a case where the change pattern selection table C is changed to the change pattern selection table C as a selection table to be used at the time of selection of the change pattern. It may be maintained without being. Specifically, when the big hit after fluctuation pattern selection counter value counted after the big hit game is included in the switching invalid section corresponding to the small hit symbol B in the switching section confirmation table at the time of the small hit end, The process of switching the variation pattern selection table at the end of the small hit is not executed, and the variation pattern selection table used at the start of variation is maintained without being changed. In this case, a plurality of fluctuations including the next fluctuation are set in the switching invalid section, and the process of changing to the fluctuation pattern selection table C at the end of the small hit is prohibited. The setting of the switching invalid section is to select a variation pattern from the variation pattern selection table B over a plurality of variations and execute a special effect. The variation is defined as a special interval, and A special section is set as a switching invalid section.

  93 (P): Then, the next fluctuation is started, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected from the fluctuation pattern selection table B is finished, and the effect design is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. ("2"-"2"-"3"). In this example, the key of the prison in which the female character is trapped is released, and a specific production is performed that says “Thank you!”.

  93 (Q): Furthermore, the next variation starts, the variation time of the variation pattern selected from the variation pattern selection table B ends, and the effect design is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. ("3"-"1"-"5"). In this example, a specific performance is performed in which a female character escapes from jail and an enemy character wakes up from sleep and utters “Nigellaleta!”.

  93 (R): Furthermore, the variation of the special symbol in the variation pattern selection table B is started, the variation time of the selected variation pattern is finished, and the effect symbol is stopped and displayed on the upper part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. ("4"-"2"-"8"). In this example, a specific performance is performed in which a female character who runs away in a car emits the line “No longer caught!”. The game mode has been changed from the prison mode to the escape mode.

  Here, the selection table used when selecting the variation pattern at the end of the variation display of the special symbol at the time of deviation after the predetermined variation number of times (stop display) is selected from the variation pattern selection table B. More specifically, the change pattern selection table A at the time of loss, the fluctuation pattern selection table A at the time of big hits, and the fluctuation pattern selection table A at the time of small hits are set. The change setting of the fluctuation pattern selection table assumes that the number of switching fluctuations defined in the switching fluctuation number table A is equal to the big hit after fluctuation pattern selection counter value counted after the big hit game ends. The switching variation pattern selection table associated with the number of switching variations is based on the variation pattern selection table A. Note that the loss variation pattern selection table A and the small hit variation pattern selection table A are defined as selection tables in which the reach effect is more easily selected than usual, as described above. Therefore, in the escape mode (low probability time shortening state), the reach effect is more easily selected than usual.

  In FIG. 94 (S): The next special symbol variation is started based on the variation pattern selected from the variation pattern selection table A.

  94 (T), (U): After that, the escape mode proceeds smoothly. This escape mode is terminated when the special symbol fluctuates 100 times after the jackpot game ends without obtaining a winning result. When the variation pattern selection counter after big hit becomes 0, the selection table used when selecting the variation pattern is changed to the variation pattern selection table N. Specifically, the variation pattern selection table N at the time of loss, the variation pattern at the time of big hit The escape mode of the game mode is terminated in response to being set in the selection table N and the small hit hour variation pattern selection table N. In addition, after the escape mode ends, the normal mode is set.

  Next, an example of a control method for specifically realizing the above effects will be described. The above-described variable display effect, reach effect, pre-reach notice effect, memory number display effect, big-time effect, etc. are all controlled through the following control process.

[Production control processing]
FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the effect control process executed by the effect control CPU 126. This effect control process is executed, for example, in a timer interrupt process (interrupt management process) separately from a reset start (main) process (not shown). The effect control CPU 126 generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined interrupt cycle (for example, a period of several tens of μs to several ms) during execution of the reset start process, and executes the timer interrupt process.

  The effect control process includes command reception process (step S400), working memory effect management process (step S401), effect symbol management process (step S402), display output process (step S404), lamp driving process (step S406), and acoustic driving. This includes a subroutine group of processing (step S408), effect random number update processing (step S410), and other processing (step S412). Hereinafter, the basic flow of the effect control process will be described along each process.

  Step S400: In the command receiving process, the effect control CPU 126 receives an effect command transmitted from the main control CPU 72. The effect control CPU 126 analyzes the received commands and stores them in the command buffer area of the RAM 130 according to type. The command for the effect transmitted from the main control CPU 72 includes, for example, a special figure destination determination effect command, a (special symbol) effect command when the operating memory number increases, a (special symbol) effect command when the operating memory number decreases, a start port Winning sound control command, demonstration effect command, lottery result command, variation pattern command, variation start command, stop symbol command, symbol stop command, state designation command, round number command, error notification command, jackpot end effect command, number cut There are a counter value command, a change pattern destination determination command, a stop display time end command, and the like.

  Step S401: In the operation memory effect management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the execution of the above-described stored number display effect and the pre-reading notice effect using the markers M1 and M2. The contents of the working memory effect management process will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

  Step S402: In the effect symbol management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the contents of the variable display effect and the stop display effect using the effect symbol based on the result of the internal lottery, or the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable prize. The content of the effect at the time of the opening / closing operation | movement of the apparatus 31 is controlled (effect execution means). In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects effect patterns of various notice effects (notice effect before reach occurrence, notice effect after reach, etc.). The contents of the effect symbol management process will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

  Step S404: In the display output process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) with basic control information of the effect contents (for example, the number of working memories of each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol). , An operation memory effect pattern number, a prefetch notice effect pattern number, a change effect pattern number, a change notice effect number, a background pattern number, etc.). Thereby, the effect display control device 144 (the display control CPU 146 and the VDP 152) controls the display operation by the liquid crystal display 42 based on the instructed effect content (effect executing means).

  Step S406: In the lamp driving process, the effect control CPU 126 outputs a control signal to the lamp driving circuit 132. In response to this, the lamp driving circuit 132 drives (turns on or off, blinks, changes in luminance gradation, etc.) the various lamps 46 to 52 and the panel lamp 53 based on the control signal.

  Step S408: In the next sound drive process, the effect control CPU 126 sends the effect contents (for example, BGM, sound data, etc. during the variable display effect, during the reach effect, during the mode transition effect, during the jackpot effect) to the sound drive circuit 134. Instruct. Thereby, the sound according to the production content is output from the speakers 54, 55, and 56.

  Step S410: In the effect random number update process, the effect control CPU 126 updates various effect random numbers in the counter area of the RAM 130. The effect random number includes, for example, a random number used for selecting a notice and a random number used for a normal background change lottery (effect lottery).

  Step S412: In other processing, for example, the effect control CPU 126 outputs a control signal to the driving IC of the movable body 40f. The movable body 40f operates using the movable body motor 57 as a drive source, and produces an effect in synchronism with the display of an image by the liquid crystal display 42 or independently.

  Through the above-described effect control process, the effect control CPU 126 can comprehensively control the effect contents in the pachinko machine 1. Next, the contents of the action memory effect management process executed in the effect control process will be described.

[Working memory production management process]
FIG. 96 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the working memory effect management process. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S700: First, the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the effect command at the time of increasing the number of working memories has been received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, and confirms whether or not the effect command at the time when the number of working memories increases is stored. When it is confirmed that the production command when the number of working memories increases is saved (step S700: Yes), the production control CPU 126 executes step S702. When it is not possible to confirm that the production command when the number of working memories increases is saved (step S700: No), the production control CPU 126 does not execute step S702.

  Step S702: The effect control CPU 126 executes an effect selection process when the number of working memories increases. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect for displaying the markers M1 and M2 corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  Step S704: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the effect command at the time when the number of working memories decreases is received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the effect command when the number of working memories is reduced is stored. When it is confirmed that the production command when the number of working memories decreases is saved (step S704: Yes), the production control CPU 126 executes step S706. If it is not possible to confirm that the effect command when the number of working memories is reduced is stored (step S704: No), the effect control CPU 126 does not execute step S706.

Step S706: The effect control CPU 126 executes effect selection processing when the number of working memories decreases. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect of sliding the markers M1 and M2 corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol and an effect of erasing the marker corresponding to the lottery element consumed by the internal lottery.
When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 95).

[Direction design management processing]
FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the effect symbol management process. The effect symbol management process includes an execution selection process (step S500), an effect symbol change pre-process (step S502), an effect symbol change process (step S504), an effect symbol stop display process (step S506), and a variable winning device operation. This is a configuration including a subroutine group of processing (step S508). Hereinafter, the basic flow of the effect symbol management process will be described along each process.

  Step S500: In the execution selection process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any one of steps S502 to S508). For example, the effect control CPU 126 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the effect symbol management process in the “jump table” as the return address. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the situation has not yet started the variation display effect, the effect control CPU 126 selects the effect symbol variation pre-processing (step S502) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the effect symbol variation pre-processing has already been completed, the effect control CPU 126 selects the effect symbol variation processing (step S504) as the next jump destination, and if the effect symbol variation in-process has been completed, As a jump destination, the effect symbol stop display in-process (step S506) is selected. The variable winning device operating process (step S508) is selected when the main winning control variable winning device management process (step S5000) is selected in the main control CPU 72 or the small winning variable variable winning device management process (step S6000) is selected. Is selected as the jump destination. In this case, steps S502 to S506 are not executed.

  Step S502: In the effect symbol variation pre-processing, the effect control CPU 126 performs an operation of preparing conditions for starting the variable display effect using the effect symbol. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the content of the reach effect according to various conditions (lottery result, winning type, variation pattern, etc.), or the effect pattern for the notice effect (the reach other than the pre-reading notice effect pattern). Pre-occurrence notice pattern, reach occurrence notice pattern, etc.). In addition, the production control CPU 126 also performs demonstration production control when the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called customer waiting state. The specific processing content will be described later using another flowchart.

  Step S504: In the effect symbol changing process, the effect control CPU 126 generates control information instructing the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) as necessary. For example, when performing an effect using the effect switching button 45 during execution of the variable display effect using the effect symbol, the effect control CPU 126 monitors whether or not the player has operated the effect button, and an effect corresponding to the result is displayed. The control information on the contents (button effect) is instructed to the display control CPU 146.

  Step S506: In the effect symbol stop display processing, the effect control CPU 126 controls the contents of the stop display effect using the effect symbols and moving images in a manner corresponding to the result of the internal lottery. That is, the effect control CPU 126 instructs the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) to end the variable display effect and execute the stop display effect. In response to this, the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) ends the variable display effect that has been actually executed in the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and executes the stop display effect. Thereby, the stop display effect is executed substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the special symbol, and the result of the internal lottery can be effectively taught (disclosure, notification, notification, etc.) to the player (design effect execution). means). However, in the present embodiment, at the time of a small hit, the stop display effect is executed in a manner similar to or approximated to a loss.

  Step S508: In the variable winning device operation process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the contents of the effect during the small hit or the big hit. In this processing, the effect control CPU 126 selects the contents of the prominent effect according to various conditions (for example, winning type). For example, in the case of 10 rounds of big hit, the production control CPU 126 selects a big role production pattern of 10 rounds of big win as the production contents to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 42, and instructs this to the production display control device 144 (display control CPU 146). To do. As a result, the image of the prominent effect is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and the effect contents change as the round progresses.

[Preliminary design change processing]
FIG. 98 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the above-described effect symbol variation pre-processing. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S600: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not a demonstration effect command is received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not a demonstration effect command is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the command for demonstration effect is stored (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S602.

  Step S602: The effect control CPU 126 executes a demo selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects a demonstration effect pattern. The demonstration effect pattern defines the contents of the effect indicating that the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called customer waiting state.

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the last address of the effect symbol management process. Then, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process as it is, and controls the contents of the demonstration effect based on the demonstration effect pattern in the subsequent display output process (step S404 in FIG. 95) and lamp driving process (step S406 in FIG. 95). To do.

  On the other hand, if it is confirmed in step S600 that the demonstration effect command is not stored (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S604.

  Step S604: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current fluctuation is out of place (non-winning). Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not a lottery result command at the time of non-winning is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is saved (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S612. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is not saved (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S606. Note that whether or not the current variation is off can be confirmed based on a variation pattern command or a stop symbol command in addition to the lottery result command. In other words, if the current variation pattern command corresponds to the outlier normal variation or outlier reach variation, it can be determined that the current variation is outlier. Alternatively, if the current stop symbol command specifies a non-winning symbol, it can be determined that the current variation is out of sync.

  Step S606: If the lottery result command is other than non-winning (missing) (step S604: No), the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current fluctuation is a big hit. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the lottery result command at the time of the big hit is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of big hit is stored (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S610. On the contrary, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of big hit is not stored (No), since only the lottery result command at the time of small hit is left, in this case, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S608. Whether or not the current variation is a big hit can also be confirmed based on a variation pattern command or a stop symbol command. That is, if the current variation pattern command corresponds to the big hit variation, it can be determined that the current variation is a big hit. If the current stop symbol command corresponds to the jackpot symbol, it can be determined that the current variation is a jackpot.

  Step S608: The effect control CPU 126 executes a small hit hour variation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72 (for example, “C0H00H” to “D0H7FH”). The effect pattern number is prepared in advance corresponding to the variation pattern command, and the effect control CPU 126 can select an effect pattern number corresponding to the variation pattern command at that time by referring to an effect pattern selection table (not shown). it can. The production pattern numbers may be prepared in pairs with the variation pattern commands, or a plurality of production pattern numbers may be prepared for one variation pattern command.

  When the effect pattern number is selected, the effect control CPU 126 refers to an effect table (not shown), changes the effect schedule (change time, reach type, and reach occurrence timing) corresponding to the change effect pattern number at that time, and stops. The display mode and the like are determined. Note that the types of effect symbols determined here correspond to the “combination of symbols at the time of a small hit”.

  The above procedure corresponds to the case of “small hit”, but in the case of hitting the big hit, the effect control CPU 126 confirms that it is “big hit” in step S606 (Yes). In this case, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S610.

  Step S610: The effect control CPU 126 executes a big hit hour fluctuation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command (for example, “E0H00H” to “F0H7FH”) received from the main control CPU 72. In the big hit time effect pattern selection processing, the processing may be further branched for each big hit time stop symbol. The specific processing content will be further described later using another flowchart.

  In the case of non-winning, the following procedure is executed. In other words, when the effect control CPU 126 confirms that there is a shift in step S604 (Yes), it next executes step S612.

  Step S612: The effect control CPU 126 executes a deviation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at the time of deviation based on the variation pattern command (for example, “A0H00H” to “A6H7FH”) received from the main control CPU 72. The effect pattern numbers at the time of losing are classified into “ordinary deviation fluctuation”, “short-time deviation fluctuation”, “outlier reach fluctuation”, and the like, and a fine reach fluctuation pattern is defined in “outlier reach fluctuation”. Note that which effect pattern number is selected by the effect control CPU 126 is determined by the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control CPU 72.

  When the effect pattern number at the time of detachment is selected, the effect control CPU 126 refers to an effect table (not shown), and the effect symbol change schedule corresponding to the change effect pattern number at that time (change time, presence / absence of reach, occurrence of reach) , Reach type and reach occurrence timing) and stop display mode (for example, “7”-“2”-“4”, etc.). The specific processing content will be further described later using another flowchart.

  When any one of the above steps S608, S610, and S612 is executed, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S614.

  Step S614: The effect control CPU 126 executes a notice selection process (notice effect executing means). In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the content of the notice effect to be executed during the current variable display effect by lottery. The content of the notice effect is determined based on, for example, the result of internal lottery (winning or non-winning) and the current internal state (normal state, high probability state, time reduction state). As described above, the notice effect is for notifying the player of the possibility that the reach state will occur during the variable display effect, or for notifying that there is a possibility that it will eventually be a big hit. Therefore, the selection ratio of the notice effect is set to be low at the time of non-winning, but the selection ratio of the notice effect is set to be relatively high to increase the player's expectation at the time of winning.

  Step S616: The effect control CPU 126 executes a mode effect management process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image corresponding to the stay mode. For example, when the stay mode is “normal mode (low probability non-time shortened state)”, the production control CPU 126 selects a background image (for example, the background image shown in FIG. 69B) where the female character is sitting on the chaise longue. Execute the process. When the stay mode is “battle mode (high probability time shortened state)”, the effect control CPU 126 performs a process of selecting a background image (for example, the background image shown in FIG. 82A) with a firework motif. Run. Further, when the stay mode is “escape mode (low probability time shortened state)”, the production control CPU 126 is a background image in which the female character escapes from the evil army (for example, the background image shown in FIG. 89A). ) Is selected. The “escape mode (low probability time shortened state)” is treated as including the “jail mode (low probability time shortened state)” (the same applies to the processing described later).

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol management process (end address). As a result, in the subsequent effect symbol variation processing (step S504 in FIG. 97), the variation display effect and the stop display effect are executed based on the actually selected variation effect pattern (effect execution means), and various A notice effect is executed based on the notice effect pattern. In addition, various stay mode effects are executed based on the background (stay) mode pattern selected here (effect execution means).

[Big hit variation pattern selection process]
FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the big hit hour variation effect pattern selection process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S800: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the internal state is a high probability time shortening state. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 can confirm the internal state by accessing the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirming the state designation command. The internal state can also be confirmed by a variation pattern command (the same applies hereinafter).

  As a result, if the internal state is the high probability time shortening state (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S804. If the internal state is not the high probability time shortening state (No), the effect control CPU 126 performs step S802. Run.

  Step S802: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the internal state is a low probability time shortening state. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 can confirm the internal state by accessing the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirming the state designation command.

  As a result, if the internal state is the low probability time shortening state (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S806. If the internal state is not the low probability time shortening state (No), the effect control CPU 126 performs step S808. Run.

  Step S804: The effect control CPU 126 executes a battle mode big hit effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, a process of selecting an effect at the time of winning shown in FIGS. 83 to 86 and the like is executed. If the variation pattern command is a command corresponding to a super reach effect, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern corresponding to the super reach effect (specific reach effect execution means), and the change pattern command is a reach other than the super reach effect. In the case of a command corresponding to an effect (normal reach effect or long reach effect), the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern corresponding to a reach effect other than the super reach effect (the same applies hereinafter).

  Step S806: The effect control CPU 126 executes an escape mode big hit effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, a reach effect is executed in the escape mode, and a process of selecting an effect that is a big hit is executed.

  Step S808: The effect control CPU 126 executes a normal mode big hit effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, a process of selecting an effect at the time of winning shown in FIG.

  And after finishing the process of step S804, step S806, or step S808, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol variation pre-process (FIG. 98).

[Variation production pattern selection process during loss]
FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the above-described variation effect pattern selection process at the time of loss. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S850: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the internal state is a high probability time shortening state. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 can confirm the internal state by accessing the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirming the state designation command.

  As a result, if the internal state is the high probability time shortening state (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S854, and if the internal state is not the high probability time shortening state (No), the effect control CPU 126 performs step S852. Run.

  Step S852: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the internal state is a low probability time shortening state. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 can confirm the internal state by accessing the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirming the state designation command.

  As a result, if the internal state is the low probability time shortening state (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S856. If the internal state is not the low probability time shortening state (No), the effect control CPU 126 performs step S858. Run.

  Step S854: The effect control CPU 126 executes effect pattern selection processing when the battle mode is off. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, processing for selecting an effect at the time of failure shown in FIGS. 83 to 86 and the like is executed.

  Step S856: The effect control CPU 126 executes an effect pattern selection process at the time of the escape mode. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, a process of selecting an effect at the time of failure shown in FIGS. 88 to 94 is executed.

  Step S858: The effect control CPU 126 executes effect pattern selection processing when the normal mode is off. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, a process of selecting an effect at the time of failure shown in FIG.

  And after finishing the process of step S854, step S856, or step S858, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol variation pre-process (FIG. 98).

[Processing when the variable winning device is activated]
FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of processing when the variable winning device is activated. The variable winning device operating process is a subroutine of execution selection processing (step S752), variable winning device operation pre-processing (step S754), variable winning device operating processing (step S756), and variable winning device operation post-processing (step S758). This is a configuration including a (program module) group. Here, first, the basic flow of the variable winning device operating process will be described along each process.

  Step S752: In the execution selection process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any one of steps S754 to S758) from the “jump table”. For example, the effect control CPU 126 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the variable winning device operating process as the return destination address in the stack pointer.

  Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the situation has not yet started the variable winning device operation pre-processing, the effect control CPU 126 selects the variable winning device operation pre-processing (step S754) as the next jump destination. Further, if the variable winning device operating pre-processing has already been completed, the effect control CPU 126 selects the variable winning device operating process (step S756) as the next jump destination. Furthermore, if the process during operation of the variable winning device is completed, the effect control CPU 126 selects the variable winning device operation post-process (step S758) as the next jump destination.

  Step S754: In the variable winning device pre-operation process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting the contents of the effect to be executed during the big hit game or the small hit game. The specific processing content will be further described later with reference to another flowchart.

  Step S756: In the variable winning device operating process, the effect control CPU 126 generates control information instructing the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) as necessary. For example, when performing an effect using the effect switching button 45 (a treasure challenge effect) during the execution of the jackpot effect, the effect control CPU 126 monitors whether or not the player has operated the effect button, and the effect contents according to the result. The control information of (button effect) is instruct | indicated with respect to display control CPU146.

  Step S758: In the post-operation of the variable prize apparatus, the effect control CPU 126 executes an effect of transmitting the transition destination mode to the player during the end time of the variable prize device. For example, in the case of winning with “10-round probability variation symbol” and “16-round probability variation symbol 1 to 3”, the effect control CPU 126 produces an effect indicating entry into the battle mode (indicated by (Z) in FIG. 80). In the case of winning with “10 round normal symbol”, a process of selecting an effect (effect shown in (L) in FIG. 74) indicating entry into the escape mode is executed. Run.

[Pre-processing of variable winning device operation]
FIG. 102 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of pre-operation of the variable winning device. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S900: The effect control CPU 126 confirms the stop symbol command. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 confirms the type of stop symbol (winning symbol) corresponding to the stop symbol command received in the previous process (command reception process: step S400). In addition, “10 round normal symbol”, “10 round probability variation symbol”, and “16 round probability variation symbol 1 to 3” are defined as the types of stop symbol (winning symbol), and it is confirmed which one is among them Is done. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S902.

  Step S902: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the type of the stop symbol (winning symbol) confirmed in the previous process (Step S900) is “16 round probability variation symbol 3”. As a result of the confirmation, when the type of the stop symbol (winning symbol) is “16 round probability variation symbol 3” (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S906. On the other hand, when the type of the stop symbol (winning symbol) is not “16 round probability variable symbol 3” (No), that is, the type of the stop symbol (winning symbol) is “10 round normal symbol”, “10 round probability variable symbol”, Or, when it is “16 round probability variation symbol 1, 2”, production control CPU126 next executes step S904.

  Step S904: The effect control CPU 126 executes a normal jackpot effect setting process. The specific processing content will be further described later with reference to another flowchart.

  Step S906: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a special festival bonus effect. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 displays various images related to the effect pattern number corresponding to the special festival bonus effect stored in advance in the image ROM 154 of the effect display control device 144 (VDP 152) as the effect contents to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 42. Read data. It should be noted that an effect based on the read various image data is executed in the effect symbol changing process (step S504 in FIG. 97). Specifically, when the big hit game is started, the read effect is executed. The Rukoto. For example, a special festival bonus effect that is executed when the current winner is “16 round probability variation 3” is displayed with images related to festivals such as “fan” and “taiko” around the screen. (FIG. 87).

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the variable winning device operating process (FIG. 101).

[Normal jackpot effect setting processing]
FIG. 103 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the normal big hit effect setting process. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S910: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the type of the stop symbol (winning symbol) confirmed in the previous process (Step S900: FIG. 102) is “10 round normal symbol”. As a result of this confirmation, when the type of the stop symbol (winning symbol) is “10 round normal symbol” (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S914. On the other hand, when the type of the stop symbol (winning symbol) is not “10 round normal symbol” (No), that is, the type of the stop symbol (winning symbol) is “10 round probability variable symbol” or “16 round probability variable symbol 1”. If “2”, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S912.

  Step S912: The effect control CPU 126 determines whether or not the type of the stop symbol (winning symbol) confirmed in the previous process (Step S900: FIG. 102) is “10 round probability variation symbol” or “16 round probability variation symbol 1”. To check. As a result of the confirmation, when the type of the stop symbol (winning symbol) is “10 round probability variation symbol” or “16 round probability variation symbol 1” (Yes), the presentation control CPU 126 next executes step S916. On the other hand, when the type of the stop symbol (winning symbol) is not “10 round probability variable symbol” or “16 round probability variable symbol 1” (No), that is, the type of stop symbol (winning symbol) is “16 round probability variable symbol”. If “2”, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S918.

  Step S914: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting the first challenge bonus effect. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 provides various effect pattern numbers corresponding to the first challenge bonus effect stored in advance in the image ROM 154 of the effect display control device 144 (VDP 152) as the effect contents to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 42. Read image data. It should be noted that an effect based on the read various image data is executed in the effect symbol changing process (step S504 in FIG. 97). Specifically, when the big hit game is started, the read effect is executed. The Rukoto. For example, the first challenge bonus effect executed in the case of winning in “10 round normal symbol” is an effect that fails in the challenge game (FIGS. 71 to 74).

  Step S916: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting the second challenge bonus effect. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 provides various effect pattern numbers corresponding to the second challenge bonus effect stored in advance in the image ROM 154 of the effect display control device 144 (VDP 152) as the effect contents to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 42. Read image data. It should be noted that an effect based on the read various image data is executed in the effect symbol changing process (step S504 in FIG. 97). Specifically, when the big hit game is started, the read effect is executed. The Rukoto. For example, the second challenge bonus effect executed in the case of winning in the “10-round probability variation symbol” or “16-round probability variation symbol 1” is a success in the challenge game and a failure in the treasure challenge effect. It is executed (FIGS. 71, 72, 75 to 78, FIG. 81).

  Step S918: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a third challenge bonus effect. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 provides various effect pattern numbers corresponding to the third challenge bonus effect stored in advance in the image ROM 154 of the effect display control device 144 (VDP 152) as the effect contents to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 42. Read image data. It should be noted that an effect based on the read various image data is executed in the effect symbol changing process (step S504 in FIG. 97). Specifically, when the big hit game is started, the read effect is executed. The Rukoto. For example, the third challenge bonus production executed in the case of winning with “16 round probability variation 2” is successful in the challenge game, successful in the treasure challenge production, and special round production is executed ( 71, 72, 75 to 80).

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the variable winning device operation pre-processing (FIG. 102).

  The images given in other production examples are merely examples, and these can be appropriately modified. Further, the structure, board surface configuration, specific numerical values and the like of the pachinko machine 1 are preferable examples including those shown in the drawings, and it goes without saying that these can be appropriately modified.

  For example, in the above embodiment (referred to as the first embodiment), the variation pattern selection table used when selecting the variation pattern related to the variation display of the special symbol, at the end of the variation display of the special symbol (at the time of stop display), A variation pattern selection table to be used at the end of the big hit game or the small hit game is set. Then, two counters (after big hit variation pattern selection) are selected as to which of the variation pattern selection tables to be set (for example, variation pattern selection tables A to C or D to F). Counter or a variation pattern selection counter after a small hit). However, the variation pattern selection table may be set using a counter different from these two counters. Specifically, a variation counter for the number of variations after big hit is prepared and the variation pattern selection table is set. Also good. A second embodiment in which the moving pattern selection table is set based on these three counters will be specifically described. It should be noted that when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or reset, the after-hit variation counter value is set to −10000.

[Changing pattern selection table setting process at end of jackpot in the second embodiment]
FIG. 104 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the big hit end variation pattern selection table setting process in the second embodiment. In this process, a newly prepared post-hit variation count counter value is set. Except for the processing for setting the counter value for the number of fluctuations after big hit, the processing is the same as that described above with reference to FIG.

  Step S5714: When the big hit after fluctuation pattern selection counter value is set in step S5712 or S5713, the main control CPU 72 sets the big hit after fluctuation number counter value. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets and stores 1 as a post-hit variation count counter value in the flag counter area of the RAM 76. Here, the variation counter value after jackpot represents the number of times the variation display of the special symbol has been performed since the end of the jackpot game, and is related to the setting of the variation pattern selection table. It should be noted that this after-hit variation counter value is incremented by one each time the special symbol variation display is completed in another process (step S4708: FIG. 105).

  When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the big hit end processing (FIG. 58).

[Change Pattern Selection Table Selection Counter Update Processing in Second Embodiment]
FIG. 105 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the variation pattern selection table selection counter update processing in the second embodiment. In this process, the newly prepared after-hit variation counter value is updated. Except for the process of updating the after-hit variation count counter value, the process is the same as that described above with reference to FIG.

  Step S4708: When processing related to the small hit after variation pattern selection counter is performed in step S4704 or step S4706, the main control CPU 72 adds 1 to the large hit after variation count counter value. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 reads the big hit after fluctuation number counter value stored in the flag counter area of the RAM 76, and stores the value obtained by adding 1 to the value again. Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S4710.

  Step S4710: The main control CPU 72 executes a counter value check process. In this processing, the main control CPU 72 checks whether the above update processing (subtraction processing (step S4702), addition processing (step S4708)) has been correctly performed on the big hit after fluctuation pattern selection counter value and the big hit after fluctuation count counter value. To do. For example, the result of adding the current big hit after fluctuation pattern selection counter value and the big hit after fluctuation count counter value before the update process (the previous one) is the big hit after fluctuation pattern selection counter value set after the big hit game. Check if they are equal. If the result is the same as a result of this check, the update process has been performed correctly, and the subsequent process is continued. On the other hand, if the result is not the same, an error has occurred and the variation pattern selection table is again displayed. The selection counter update process is executed. Furthermore, when an error occurs many times, the error can be notified to the main controller 70 that some abnormality has occurred. It should be noted that this processing need not be executed when the big hit post-change pattern selection counter value is zero.

  By this processing, it is possible to handle the post-hit variation count counter value used when setting the variation pattern selection table as accurate, and the variation display of the special symbol is displayed according to the variation pattern selected by the incorrect variation pattern selection table. It can be prevented from being executed.

  When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol stop display process (FIG. 48).

[Variation Pattern Selection Table Setting Process in Second Embodiment]
FIG. 106 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the variation pattern selection table setting process in the second embodiment. In this process, the newly prepared after-hit variation count counter value is used, and the variation pattern selection table is set. Except for the processing that uses the after-hit variation counter value, the processing is the same as that in FIG.

  Step S4720: The main control CPU 72 refers to the after-hit variation count counter value. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 refers to the big hit after fluctuation count counter value stored in the flag counter area of the RAM 76. It should be noted that this after-hit variation counter value is updated (added by 1) in step S4599 (FIG. 48) during the special symbol stop display process, and the updated after-hit variation counter value is referred to. . Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S4722.

  Step S4722: The main control CPU 72 refers to the switching variation number table. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 refers to a switching variation number table stored in the ROM 74 in advance. Here, the switching variation number table referred to in the second embodiment using the after-hit variation count counter value is different from the switching variation table referenced in the first embodiment. The specific contents of the switching fluctuation number table will be further described later with reference to another example. Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S4724.

[Switching Fluctuation Number Table A in Second Embodiment (Low Probability Time Reduction State)]
FIG. 107 is a diagram illustrating an example of the switching variation number table A (low probability time reduction state) in the second embodiment.
This switching variation number table is a table used in the case of the low probability time shortening state in the second embodiment in which the variation pattern selection table is set based on the after-hit variation number counter value. In addition, the switching variation number table has a structure in which, for example, a “switching variation number” and a “switching variation pattern selection table” are stored as a set in order from the top address. Here, the number of switching fluctuations represents the value of the number of fluctuations of a special symbol as a guide for switching the fluctuation pattern selection table, and the switching fluctuation pattern selection table represents a fluctuation pattern selection table after switching. For example, different values “6”, “11”, “21”, “31”,..., “101” are provided in the “switching variation number”. A “variation pattern selection table” is assigned. The switching variation pattern selection table defines a variation pattern selection table used at the time of loss, a variation pattern selection table used at the time of big hit, and a variation pattern selection table used at the time of small hit.

  The switching variation pattern selection tables such as the number of switching variations “6” and “21” correspond to the variation pattern selection table B for loss, the variation pattern selection table A for big hit, and the variation pattern selection table B for small hit. The switching variation pattern selection tables such as the number of switching variations “11” and “31” correspond to the variation pattern selection table A at the time of loss, the variation pattern selection table A at the time of big hit, and the variation pattern selection table A at the time of small hit. . The switching variation pattern selection table with the switching variation number “101” corresponds to the variation pattern selection table N at the time of loss, the variation pattern selection table N at the time of big hit, and the variation pattern selection table N at the time of small hit.

[Switching variation number table B in the second embodiment (high probability time reduction state)]
FIG. 108 is a diagram illustrating an example of the switching variation number table B (high probability time reduction state) in the second embodiment.
This switching variation number table is a table used in the case of the high probability time shortening state in the second embodiment in which the variation pattern selection table is set based on the variation count counter value after big hit. In addition, the switching variation number table has a structure in which, for example, a “switching variation number” and a “switching variation pattern selection table” are stored as a set in order from the top address. For example, different values “6”, “11”, “21”, “31”,..., “10001” are provided in the “number of switching fluctuations”. A “variation pattern selection table” is assigned. The switching variation pattern selection table defines a variation pattern selection table used at the time of loss, a variation pattern selection table used at the time of big hit, and a variation pattern selection table used at the time of small hit.

  The switching variation pattern selection tables such as the number of switching variations “6” and “21” correspond to the variation pattern selection table E for loss, the variation pattern selection table D for big hit, and the variation pattern selection table D for small hit. The switching variation pattern selection tables such as the number of switching variations “11” and “31” correspond to the variation pattern selection table D at the time of loss, the variation pattern selection table D at the time of big hit, and the variation pattern selection table D at the time of small hit. . Further, the switching variation pattern selection table with the switching variation number “10001” corresponds to the variation pattern selection table N at the time of loss, the variation pattern selection table N at the time of big hit, and the variation pattern selection table N at the time of small hit.

  In the second embodiment in which the variation pattern selection table is set based on the variation count counter value after the big hit, regarding these two switching variation number tables A and B, the switching variation number is defined in descending order from the largest value in the first embodiment. In contrast, in the second embodiment, the values are defined in ascending order from a small value. In other words, when defining the number of switching fluctuations, the first embodiment defines a predetermined number (for example, 100 or 10000) after the big hit game as a reference, whereas the second embodiment determines after the big hit game has ended. Since it is defined in the standard, it is possible to intuitively connect the number of fluctuations in which the special symbol fluctuation display is executed and the prescribed fluctuation number. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a programming error when programming the switching variation number in the switching variation number table.

[See FIG. 106: Fluctuation Pattern Selection Table Setting Processing in Second Embodiment]
Step S4724: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the big hit post-change number counter value is equal to the switching change number. Specifically, whether or not the big hit after fluctuation count counter value referred to in the previous process (step S4720) is equal to the value of the switching fluctuation number defined in the table referred to in the previous process (step S4722). Confirm. As a result of this confirmation, when the big hit after fluctuation count counter value is equal to the switching fluctuation number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4726. On the other hand, if the after-hit variation counter value is not equal to the switching variation number (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4730. When the gaming state is a normal state (low probability non-time shortened state), the switching step number table is not referred to in the previous process (step S4722), so the next step is not performed without comparing the values. S4730 may be executed.

[Change pattern selection table setting process at end of small hits in the second embodiment]
FIG. 109 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the small hit end variation pattern selection table setting process in the second embodiment. In this process, the newly prepared after-hit variation count counter value is used, and the variation pattern selection table is set. Since the processing other than the processing using the after-hit variation counter value is the same as FIG. 65 described above, the description thereof is omitted.

  Step S6620: The main control CPU 72 refers to the after-hit variation count counter value. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 refers to the big hit after fluctuation count counter value stored in the flag counter area of the RAM 76. It should be noted that this after-hit variation counter value is updated (added by 1) in step S4599 (FIG. 48) during the special symbol stop display process, and the updated after-hit variation counter value is referred to. . Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S6622.

  Step S6622: The main control CPU 72 refers to the switching variation number table. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 refers to a switching variation number table stored in the ROM 74 in advance. Here, the switching variation number table is a table for setting which variation pattern selection table to use based on the after-hit variation number counter value referred to in the previous process (step S6620). Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S6624.

  When the gaming state is the normal state (low probability non-time shortened state), the variation pattern selection table is fixed (variation pattern selection table N) regardless of the variation count value after the big hit (the variation pattern selection table N). Since the switching variation number table is not defined, this process (step S6622) may be ignored. On the other hand, when the gaming state is the low probability time shortening state and the high probability time shortening state, different switching variation number tables A and B (FIGS. 107 and 108) are respectively defined. The corresponding switching variation number table is referred to according to the state.

  Step S6624: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the big hit after fluctuation count counter value is equal to the switching fluctuation number. Specifically, whether or not the big hit after fluctuation number counter value referred in the previous process (step S6620) is equal to the value of the switching fluctuation number specified in the table referred to in the previous process (step S6622). Confirm. As a result of this confirmation, when the big hit change count counter value is equal to the switching change number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S6626. On the other hand, if the after-hit variation counter value is not equal to the switching variation number (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S6631. When the gaming state is the normal state (low probability non-time shortened state), the switching variation number table is not referred to in the previous process (step S6622), so the next step is not performed without comparing the values. S6631 may be executed.

  Step S6626: The main control CPU 72 sets a variation pattern selection table according to the switching variation number table. Specifically, the switching fluctuation number table (switching fluctuation number table A in the low probability time shortening state, switching fluctuation number table B in the high probability time shortening state) referred to according to the current gaming state and the number of fluctuations after the big hit Based on the counter value (number of switching fluctuations), the fluctuation pattern selection table to be used is set.

  For example, if the gaming state is a low probability time shortening state and the after-hit variation count counter is “6” or “21”, the variation pattern selection table to be used from now on is the variation pattern selection table B at the time of loss. The big hit time fluctuation pattern selection table A and the small hit time fluctuation pattern selection table B. When the gaming state is a low probability time shortening state and the after-hit variation counter is “11” or “31”, the variation pattern selection table to be used from now on is the variation pattern selection table A at the time of loss. The big hit time variation pattern selection table A and the small hit time variation pattern selection table A.

  On the other hand, for example, when the gaming state is a state with a high probability time shortening and the after-hit variation counter is “6” or “21”, the variation pattern selection table to be used from now on is the variation pattern selection at the time of loss. Table E, big hit variation pattern selection table D, and small hit variation pattern selection table E. When the gaming state is a state with a high probability time reduction and the after-hit variation counter is “11” or “31”, the variation pattern selection table to be used from now on is the variation pattern selection table D at the time of loss. The big hit time fluctuation pattern selection table D and the small hit time fluctuation pattern selection table D.

  When the variation pattern selection table is set according to the switching variation number table, the main control CPU 72 returns to the small hit end processing (FIG. 64).

  Step S6631: The main control CPU 72 confirms the type of the small hit symbol at the time of the small hit. Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S6633.

  Step S6633: The main control CPU 72 refers to the switching section confirmation table at the end of the small hits. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 refers to the small hit end switching section confirmation table in the second embodiment stored in the ROM 74 in advance. Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S6635.

  Step S6635: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the big hit post-change pattern selection counter value is included in the switching invalid section. Specifically, for the big hit after fluctuation number counter value referred in the previous process (step S6620), the small hit symbol confirmed in the previous process (step S6631) in the table referred to in the previous process (step S6633). It is confirmed whether or not the big hit after fluctuation pattern selection counter value is included in the corresponding switching invalid section. As a result of this confirmation, when the big hit variation count counter value is included in the switching invalid section (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the small hit end processing (FIG. 64). On the other hand, if the after-hit variation count counter value is not included in the switching invalid section (No), that is, if the after-hit variation count counter value is included in the switching effective section, the main control CPU 72 performs the next step. S6700 is executed.

  FIG. 110 is a diagram illustrating an example of a small hit end switching section confirmation table according to the second embodiment. The configuration of the small hit end switching section confirmation table is the same as that of the first embodiment (FIG. 66), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  For example, different values “1 to 5”, “6 to 10”, “11 to 13”, “14 to 16”, “17” are set in the “switching valid section / switching invalid section” of the “low probability time reduction state”. ˜20 ”,“ 21-30 ”,... Are similarly provided for the“ switching valid section / switching invalid section ”of the“ high probability time shortening state ”, and different values“ 1-5 ”,“ 6˜ 10 ”,“ 11-13 ”,“ 14-16 ”,“ 17-20 ”,“ 21-30 ”,... Are provided, and“ small ”for each“ switching valid section / switching invalid section ”. “Changeability of change pattern selection table after end of hit” is assigned.

  For example, for the switching valid section / switching invalid section “1-5”, the small pattern symbol A can switch the variation pattern selection table at the end of the small hit, and the other small hit symbol B, small hit symbol C This is also possible for. For the switching valid section / switching invalid section “6 to 10”, switching of the variation pattern selection table is not allowed at the small hitting symbol A at the end of the small hitting, and other small hitting symbols B and small hitting symbols C The same is not allowed. For the switching valid section / switching invalid section “11 to 13”, switching of the variation pattern selection table is not permitted at the end of the small hit in the small hit symbol A, and other small hit symbols B and small hit symbols C On the contrary, switching is possible. For the switching valid section / switching invalid section “14 to 16”, switching of the variation pattern selection table is not permitted at the end of the small hit in the small hit symbol B, and other small hit symbols A and small hit symbols C On the contrary, switching is possible. For the switching valid section / switching invalid section “17-20”, switching of the variation pattern selection table is not permitted at the end of the small hit in the small hit symbol C, and other small hit symbols A and small hit symbol B On the contrary, switching is possible. For the switching valid section / switching invalid section “21-30”, switching of the variation pattern selection table is not permitted at the end of the small hit in the small hit symbol A, and other small hit symbols B and small hit symbols C The same is not allowed.

  In addition, for example, in the small hit symbol D, switching of the variation pattern selection table is not permitted at the end of the small hit for all the sections. The change pattern selection table can be switched at the end.

  In this embodiment, five types of small hit symbols are defined, and five types are distributed in common between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but five types are assigned to the first special symbol. Of these, only three types may be employed, or only two types may be employed for the second special symbol. Moreover, although the possibility of switching of the variation pattern selection table is set to be the same in the low probability time reduction state and the high probability time reduction state, they may be set differently. Further, whether or not to switch the variation pattern selection table is set for each small hit symbol based on each segment (switching valid segment / switch invalid segment), but each segment may be set based on the small hit symbol. .

  As described above, in the second embodiment in which the variation pattern selection table is set based on the variation count counter value after the big hit, in the first embodiment, the switching effective interval / switching invalid interval is set to a large value in the first embodiment. In the second embodiment, the values are defined in descending order, while the values are specified in ascending order from the smallest value. In other words, when defining the number of switching fluctuations, the first embodiment defines a predetermined number (for example, 100 or 10000) after the big hit game as a reference, whereas the second embodiment determines after the big hit game has ended. Since it is defined in the standard, it is possible to intuitively connect the number of fluctuations in which the special symbol fluctuation display is executed and the prescribed fluctuation number. In the first embodiment, the switching valid section / switching invalid section is defined as different values depending on the gaming state, but in the second embodiment, the values of the switching valid section / switching invalid section are the same. It can be a value. From the above, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a program error when programming the switching variation number in the switching variation number table.

[Switching example of variation pattern selection table in the second embodiment]
FIG. 111 is a diagram illustrating an example of switching of the variation pattern selection table in the second embodiment. This example is a switching example in which the variation pattern selection table is set in the second embodiment in which a newly prepared after-hit variation count counter value is used. It is assumed that the gaming state after the big hit game is set to a low probability time shortening state.

  For example, when the first variation display of the special symbol is started after the end of the big hit game, in the previous processing (step S5706: FIG. 104), the “variation pattern selection table A (the variation pattern selection table A at the time of loss, Table A, small variation pattern selection table A) ”is set. The big hit after fluctuation pattern selection counter and the big hit after fluctuation number counter are set to “100” and “1”, respectively.

  Further, since the result of the first internal lottery of the special symbol is out of place, the variation pattern of the special symbol is selected from the “variation pattern selection table A at the time of loss”. Then, at the end of the first variation display of the special symbol (at the time of stop display), the variation pattern selection table to be used from now on is the “variation pattern selection table A” unchanged. Also, at the end of the first variation display of the special symbol (at the time of stop display), the after-hit variation pattern selection counter and the after-hit variation number of times counter are updated to “99” and “2”, respectively.

  After that, since the result of the internal lottery was a small hit (small hit symbol A) at the start of the second variation display of the special symbol, the special symbol variation pattern is “small hit hour variation pattern selection table A”. It is selected from the inside. Then, at the end of the small hit game after the end of the second variation display of the special symbol, the variation pattern selection table to be used is changed from “variation pattern selection table A” to “variation pattern selection table C (fluctuation pattern at the time of loss”). The selection table C, the big hit time fluctuation pattern selection table A, and the small hit time fluctuation pattern selection table C) ”. At the end of the second variation display of the special symbol (during stop display), the after-hit variation pattern selection counter and after-hit variation number counter are updated to “98” and “3”, respectively.

  The change of the variation pattern selection table will be specifically described. When the number of changes after the big hit is “3” and the type of the special symbol stop symbol (winning symbol) at the small hit is the small hit symbol A, the small hit end switching section confirmation table (FIG. 110) According to the above, the change pattern selection table can be changed (within the switching effective section). Therefore, at the end of the small hit game, the variation pattern selection table to be used is changed from “variation pattern selection table A” to “variation pattern selection table C”.

  At the start of the 3rd to 5th variation display of the special symbol, the result of the internal lottery was out of order, so the variation pattern of the special symbol is selected from the “variation pattern selection table C at the time of loss”. At the end of the 3rd and 4th variation display of the special symbol (during stop display), the variation pattern selection table to be used from now on is the “variation pattern selection table C” unchanged. At the end of the 3rd and 4th fluctuation display of special symbols (when stopped), the big hit after fluctuation pattern selection counter and the big hit after fluctuation count counter are updated to “97, 96” and “4, 5”, respectively. The

  On the other hand, at the end of the fifth variation display of the special symbol (during stop display), the variation pattern selection table to be used is changed from “variation pattern selection table C” to “variation pattern selection table B (fluctuation pattern variation table selection table). B, change pattern selection table A for big hits, change pattern selection table B) for small hits ”. This is because at the end of the 5th fluctuation display of the special symbol (when stopped), the big hit after fluctuation pattern selection counter and the big hit after fluctuation count counter are updated to “95” and “6”, respectively. Since the counter value is the same value as the switching fluctuation number (6) in the switching fluctuation number table A (FIG. 107), the process of switching to the switching fluctuation pattern selection table defined in the switching fluctuation number table A (step S4726: FIG. 106). Is due to.

  Thereafter, when the 6th to 10th variation display of the special symbol is started, the result of the internal lottery is out of order, and the variation pattern of the special symbol is selected from the “variation pattern selection table B at the time of loss”. At the end of the 6th to 9th variation display of the special symbol (during stop display), the variation pattern selection table to be used from now on is “variation pattern selection table B” unchanged. Also, at the end of the 6th to 9th fluctuation display of the special symbol (during stop display), the big hit after fluctuation pattern selection counter and the big hit after fluctuation number counter are updated to “94 to 91” and “7 to 10”, respectively. The

  On the other hand, at the end of the 10th variation display of the special symbol (during stop display), the variation pattern selection table to be used is changed from “variation pattern selection table B” to “variation pattern selection table A (fluctuation pattern selection table at loss”). A, big hit time fluctuation pattern selection table A, small hit time fluctuation pattern selection table A) ”. This is because at the end of the 10th variation display of the special symbol (stop display), the variation pattern selection counter after big hit and the variation counter after big hit are updated to “90” and “11”, respectively, Since the counter value is the same value as the switching fluctuation number (11) in the switching fluctuation number table A (FIG. 107), the process of switching to the switching fluctuation pattern selection table defined in the switching fluctuation number table A (step S4726: FIG. 106). Is due to.

  Thereafter, at the start of the 11th to 14th fluctuation display of the special symbol, the result of the internal lottery was out of order, so the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is selected from the “fluctuation pattern selection table A at the time of loss”. Note that at the end of the 11th to 14th variation display of the special symbol (during stop display), the variation pattern selection table to be used from now on is the “variation pattern selection table A” unchanged. In addition, at the end of the 11th to 14th fluctuation display of the special symbol (during stop display), the big hit after fluctuation pattern selection counter and the big hit after fluctuation number counter are updated to “89 to 86” and “12 to 15”, respectively. The

  After that, since the result of the internal lottery was a small hit (small hit symbol B) at the start of the fifteenth fluctuation display of the special symbol, the special symbol fluctuation pattern is “small hit hour fluctuation pattern selection table A”. It is selected from the inside. Then, at the end of the small hit game after the end of the fifteenth variation display of the special symbol, the variation pattern selection table to be used from now on is the “variation pattern selection table A” unchanged. At the end of the fifteenth variation display of the special symbol (when stopped), the big hit after fluctuation pattern selection counter and the big hit after fluctuation number counter are updated to “85” and “16”, respectively.

  The fact that the change of the variation pattern selection table has not been executed will be specifically described. When the big hit variation counter is “16” and the type of the special symbol stop symbol (winning symbol) at the small hit is the small hit symbol B, the small hit end switching section confirmation table (FIG. 110) According to the above, change of the variation pattern selection table is not allowed (switching invalid section). Therefore, at the end of the small hit game, the change of the variation pattern selection table to be used is not executed, and the “variation pattern selection table A” is not changed and is maintained.

  At the start of the 16th to 20th variation display of the special symbol, the result of the internal lottery is out of order, so that the variation pattern of the special symbol is selected from the “variation pattern selection table A at the time of loss”. Note that, at the end of the 16th to 19th variation display of the special symbol (during stop display), the variation pattern selection table to be used from now on is the “variation pattern selection table A” unchanged. Also, at the end of the 16th to 19th fluctuation display of the special symbol (during stop display), the big hit after fluctuation pattern selection counter and the big hit after fluctuation number counter are updated to “84 to 81” and “17 to 20”, respectively. The

  On the other hand, at the end of the twentieth variation display of the special symbol (during stop display), the variation pattern selection table to be used is changed from “variation pattern selection table A” to “variation pattern selection table B (fluctuation pattern variation table selection table). B, change pattern selection table A for big hits, change pattern selection table B) for small hits ”. This is because at the end of the 20th fluctuation display of the special symbol (at the time of stop display), the big hit after fluctuation pattern selection counter and the big hit after fluctuation count counter are updated to “80” and “21”, respectively. Since the counter value is the same value as the switching fluctuation number (21) of the switching fluctuation number table A (FIG. 107), the process of switching to the switching fluctuation pattern selection table defined in the switching fluctuation number table A (step S4726: FIG. 106). Is due to.

  At the start of the 21st variation display of the special symbol, the result of the internal lottery is off, so the variation pattern of the special symbol is selected from the “variation pattern selection table B at the time of loss”. Then, at the end of the 21st variation display of the special symbol (at the time of stop display), the variation pattern selection table to be used from now on is the “variation pattern selection table B” unchanged. Also, at the end of the 21st fluctuation display of the special symbol (during stop display), the big hit after fluctuation pattern selection counter and the big hit after fluctuation number counter are updated to “79” and “22”, respectively.

  Thereafter, a variation pattern is selected using a variation pattern selection table set at the start of the variation display of the special symbol. Also, at the end of the special symbol fluctuation display (stop display), the switching fluctuation number table A or the like, while updating the values of the fluctuation pattern selection counter after big hit, the fluctuation pattern selection counter after small hit, and the fluctuation count counter after big hit When the condition for switching the variation pattern selection table with reference to B is satisfied, a process for switching to the specified one is performed.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, when the variation pattern selection table is set, the accuracy of switching the variation pattern can be improved by using three counters. Also, regarding the second embodiment in which the variation pattern selection table is set based on the variation count counter value after the big hit, the first embodiment defines the descending order from the largest value, whereas the second embodiment begins with the smaller value. It is defined in ascending order. In other words, when defining the number of switching fluctuations, the first embodiment defines a predetermined number (for example, 100 or 10000) after the big hit game as a reference, whereas the second embodiment determines after the big hit game has ended. Since it is defined in the standard, it is possible to intuitively connect the number of fluctuations in which the special symbol fluctuation display is executed and the prescribed fluctuation number. Furthermore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a program error when programming the switching variation number in the switching variation number table.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 8 Game board unit 8a Game area 20 Start gate 28 Variable start winning device 33 Normal symbol display device 33a Normal symbol operation | movement memory lamp 34 1st special symbol display device 35 2nd special symbol display device 34a 1st special symbol operation memory Lamp 35a Second special symbol operation memory lamp 38 Game state display device 42 Liquid crystal display 45 Effect switching button 70 Main control device 72 Main control CPU
74 ROM
76 RAM
124 Production control device 126 Production control CPU

Claims (7)

An internal lottery execution means for executing an internal lottery when a lottery opportunity occurs during the game;
When the internal lottery is executed, the symbol display means for displaying the symbols in a manner corresponding to the result of the internal lottery after the symbols are variably displayed over a predetermined variation time;
Regarding the pattern variation pattern by the symbol display means, a variation pattern defining means for predefining a plurality of types of variation patterns including special variation patterns;
A variation pattern determining means for selectively determining any one of a plurality of types of variation patterns defined by the variation pattern defining means when executing the symbol variation display by the symbol display means;
With respect to results other than non-winning obtained by the internal lottery, lottery result defining means for prescribing a plurality of types other than non-winning including at least a special type, a first special type, and a second special type;
When a result other than non-winning is obtained in the internal lottery, a lottery type determining unit that determines which of the plurality of types other than non-winning specified by the lottery result defining unit corresponds to;
Special game execution means for executing a special game when the symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to the special type by the symbol display means;
Special game execution means for executing a special game when a symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to the first special type or the second special type by the symbol display means;
The variation pattern that can be selected by the variation pattern determination unit for a special section until the number of variation after special game corresponding to the number of variation display of the symbol executed by the symbol display means after the end of the special game reaches a specified number. Variation pattern selection means for selecting the special variation pattern as
When a specific condition is satisfied during the special section, the variation pattern that can be selected by the variation pattern determination means is changed from the special variation pattern to another variation pattern before the number of variations after the special game reaches the specified number of times. Switch to
When the special game executed by the special game execution means corresponds to the second special type, the change to the special variation pattern by the variation pattern selection means is not performed after the special game ends, A gaming machine comprising: variation pattern switching means that enables selection of a variation pattern that was selectable by the variation pattern determination means before the start of the special game. In the gaming machine according to claim 1,
The variation pattern switching means includes
The special game execution means performs the special game execution means when the post-special game variation count corresponding to the number of symbol variations displayed after the special game ends is within a special section from a predetermined first count to a second count. When the game is executed and the special game executed by the special game execution means corresponds to the second special type, the special fluctuation pattern by the fluctuation pattern selection means after the end of the special game A game machine characterized in that a change pattern that can be selected by the change pattern determination means before the start of the special game can be selected without switching to the game. The gaming machine according to claim 2,
The variation pattern selection means includes:
The special game is executed by the special game execution means when the number of fluctuations after the special game is within the special section, and the special game executed by the special game execution means corresponds to the first special type. If it is, for the special section after the end of the special game, select the special variation pattern as a variation pattern that can be selected by the variation pattern determination means,
The special game is executed by the special game execution means and the special game execution means is executed when the variation number after the special game is within a second special section from a predetermined third number to a fourth number. When the special game corresponds to the second special type, the special variation pattern is selected as a variation pattern that can be selected by the variation pattern determination means for the special section after the end of the special game. And
The variation pattern switching means includes
The special game is executed by the special game executing means when the number of fluctuations after the special game is within the second special section, and the special game executed by the special game executing means is the first special type. When the special game is over, the variation pattern selection unit does not switch to the special variation pattern after the end of the special game, and the variation pattern determination unit can select the variation before the start of the special game. A gaming machine characterized in that a pattern can be selected. In the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3,
The variation pattern defining means includes
As the special variation pattern, a first special variation pattern and a second special variation pattern different from the first special variation pattern are defined,
The variation pattern selection means includes:
The first special variation pattern is selected as a variation pattern that can be selected by the variation pattern determination means for a special section until the number of variations after the special game reaches a predetermined number, while the variation pattern determination means for the special section. Select the second special variation pattern as a variation pattern that can be selected,
The variation pattern switching means includes
When the special game is executed during the special section, the variation pattern determining means shifts from the special section to the special section before the number of fluctuations after the special game reaches the predetermined number. When the selectable variation pattern is switched from the first special variation pattern to the second special variation pattern, and the specific condition is satisfied during the special section, the variation number after the special game is the specified number of times. Before reaching the special interval, the variation pattern determining means switches the variation pattern that can be selected from the second special variation pattern to the first special variation pattern. Gaming machine. In the gaming machine according to claim 4,
The first special variation pattern is:
It consists of multiple special variation pattern groups of different types,
In the special section,
The plurality of special variation pattern groups are used in a predetermined order according to the number of variations after the special game,
The variation pattern switching means includes
When a situation of switching from one special variation pattern group to another special variation pattern group occurs among the plurality of special variation pattern groups, the variation pattern determination unit assumes that the specific condition is satisfied. A game machine, wherein a selectable variation pattern is switched from the second special variation pattern to the first special variation pattern included in another special variation pattern group. In the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5,
A variation count counting means after special game for counting the number of variations after the special game;
In addition to the post-special game variation count counting means, the post-special game variation count counting means for counting the post-special game variation count further includes:
The variation pattern switching means includes
When the variation number after special game counted by the variation count after special game reaches a predetermined switching value, a variation pattern that can be selected by the variation pattern determination unit is determined as the specific condition is satisfied. Switching from the special variation pattern to the other variation pattern. In the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 6,
Symbol effect execution means for executing a stop display effect corresponding to a symbol stop display by the symbol display means after executing a variable display effect corresponding to the symbol change display by the symbol display means within the variable time; ,
Execution of the variable display effect by the symbol effect execution means when the winning result is obtained in the internal lottery and the winning type determination means determines that it corresponds to the first special type or the second special type A reach production execution means for performing a reach production inside,
The special game execution means is
Execute the special game after the reach production,
The variation pattern selection means includes:
A gaming machine, wherein the special variation pattern is selected as a variation pattern that can be selected by the variation pattern determination means for the special section after the end of the special game executed after the end of the reach effect.